]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texi
Add R_AARCH64_P32_MOVW_PREL_* ELF32 relocs
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb 762
06ddcada
AM
763@item
764How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 765
06ddcada
AM
766When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
769
770@smallexample
771Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772@end smallexample
773
06ddcada 774This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
775merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778@smallexample
06ddcada 779Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
780@end smallexample
781
06ddcada 782This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
783when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
785@end itemize
786
035801ce
FS
787@cindex link map discarded
788@kindex --print-map-discarded
789@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790@item --print-map-discarded
791@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
252b5132
RH
795@kindex -n
796@cindex read-only text
797@cindex NMAGIC
798@kindex --nmagic
799@item -n
800@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
801Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
804
805@kindex -N
806@kindex --omagic
807@cindex read/write from cmd line
808@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 809@item -N
252b5132
RH
810@itemx --omagic
811Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
812not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
814mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
817
818@kindex --no-omagic
819@cindex OMAGIC
820@item --no-omagic
821This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
825
826@kindex -o @var{output}
827@kindex --output=@var{output}
828@cindex naming the output file
829@item -o @var{output}
830@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 831Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
832option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835@kindex -O @var{level}
836@cindex generating optimized output
837@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 838If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 839the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
840should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 845
387dd777
DP
846@kindex -plugin @var{name}
847@item -plugin @var{name}
848Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852wish.
853
854Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
1c82ed74 858copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 859based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 860just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 861
26278bb8
UD
862@kindex --push-state
863@cindex push state governing input file handling
864@item --push-state
865The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879something as follows:
880
881@smallexample
882-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883@end smallexample
884
885@kindex --pop-state
886@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 887@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
888Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889flags governing input file handling.
890
a712da20
NC
891@kindex -q
892@kindex --emit-relocs
893@cindex retain relocations in final executable
894@item -q
895@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 896Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
897Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899in larger executables.
900
dbab7a7b
NC
901This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
4f471f39
RS
903@kindex --force-dynamic
904@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905@item --force-dynamic
906Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907to VxWorks targets.
908
252b5132
RH
909@cindex partial link
910@cindex relocatable output
911@kindex -r
1049f94e 912@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 913@item -r
1049f94e 914@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 915Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 916turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
917linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 920@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
921If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
62bf86b4
HPN
925When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929with input files in other formats at all.
930
252b5132
RH
931This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933@kindex -R @var{file}
934@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935@cindex symbol-only input
936@item -R @var{filename}
937@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
ff5dcc92 943For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 944followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 945the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
946
947@kindex -s
948@kindex --strip-all
949@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 950@item -s
252b5132
RH
951@itemx --strip-all
952Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954@kindex -S
955@kindex --strip-debug
956@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 957@item -S
252b5132
RH
958@itemx --strip-debug
959Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
a70f34c0
NC
961@kindex --strip-discarded
962@kindex --no-strip-discarded
963@item --strip-discarded
964@itemx --no-strip-discarded
965Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966Enabled by default.
967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -t
969@kindex --trace
970@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 971@item -t
252b5132 972@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
973Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
978
979@kindex -T @var{script}
980@kindex --script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -T @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 985@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 986@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
987output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990options accumulate.
252b5132 991
14be8564
L
992@kindex -dT @var{script}
993@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994@cindex script files
995@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006@samp{gcc}).
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex undefined symbol
1011@item -u @var{symbol}
1012@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
0a618243
AB
1019If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022instead.
1023
1024@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbols, require defined
1026@cindex defined symbol
1027@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
252b5132
RH
1035@kindex -Ur
1036@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1037@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1038For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1040turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1041@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045@samp{-r} for the others.
1046
c005eb9e
AB
1047@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048@cindex orphan sections
1049@cindex sections, orphan
1050@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056@table @code
1057@item place
1058Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1060@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1061
1062@item discard
1063All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066@item warn
1067The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068issue a warning.
1069
1070@item error
1071The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072@end table
1073
1074The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
577a0623
AM
1076@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1085
252b5132
RH
1086@kindex -v
1087@kindex -V
1088@kindex --version
1089@cindex version
1090@item -v
1091@itemx --version
1092@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1093Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1094lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096@kindex -x
1097@kindex --discard-all
1098@cindex deleting local symbols
1099@item -x
1100@itemx --discard-all
1101Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103@kindex -X
1104@kindex --discard-locals
1105@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1106@item -X
252b5132 1107@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1108Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114@cindex symbol tracing
1115@item -y @var{symbol}
1116@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124@kindex -Y @var{path}
1125@item -Y @var{path}
1126Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1131The recognized keywords are:
1132@table @samp
1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item bndplt
1135Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
233a0083
L
1149@item cet-report=none
1150@itemx cet-report=warning
1151@itemx cet-report=error
1152Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
cd6d6c15 1164@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165@itemx nocombreloc
1166Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1168
b8871f35 1169@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1170@itemx nocommon
1171Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1180Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1183
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192these options.
1193
6aa29e7b
JJ
1194@item execstack
1195Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
b039ef04
L
1197@item global
1198This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
93ab9c0d
NC
1202@item globalaudit
1203This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1207the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1208all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item ibtplt
1211Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
8df93cb5 1214@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1215Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
cd6d6c15
NC
1219@item initfirst
1220This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225objects.
1226
1227@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1231
5fa222e4
AM
1232@item lazy
1233When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236Lazy binding is the default.
1237
cd6d6c15 1238@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1239Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1240
e6e2dfbd
AM
1241@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item muldefs
1245Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1246
cd6d6c15 1247@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1248Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1250
1251@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1254
1255@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1256Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1257
1258@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1259Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1260
1261@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1262Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1263
6aa29e7b
JJ
1264@item noexecstack
1265Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item noextern-protected-data
1268Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item noreloc-overflow
1276Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item now
1281When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1286
1287@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1288Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1289
6aa29e7b 1290@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1291@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1292Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1296Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1297
47acac12
L
1298@item separate-code
1299@itemx noseparate-code
1300Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item shstk
1306Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1309
04c3a755 1310@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1311Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1312Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
e6e2dfbd
AM
1315@item text
1316@itemx notext
1317@itemx textoff
1318Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1321
97a232d7
NC
1322@item undefs
1323Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
cd6d6c15
NC
1327@end table
1328
ece2d90e 1329Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1330
1331@kindex -(
1332@cindex groups of archives
1333@item -( @var{archives} -)
1334@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1344they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1345resolved.
1346
1347Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349more archives.
1350
69da35b5
NC
1351@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1356recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1357and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1362
4a43e768
AM
1363@kindex --as-needed
1364@kindex --no-as-needed
1365@item --as-needed
1366@itemx --no-as-needed
1367This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1368on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1369the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1371needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1372emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1374the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1376Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1380
e56f61be
L
1381@kindex --add-needed
1382@kindex --no-add-needed
1383@item --add-needed
1384@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1385These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1389
252b5132
RH
1390@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391@item -assert @var{keyword}
1392This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394@kindex -Bdynamic
1395@kindex -dy
1396@kindex -call_shared
1397@item -Bdynamic
1398@itemx -dy
1399@itemx -call_shared
1400Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1405@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1406
a1ab1d2a
UD
1407@kindex -Bgroup
1408@item -Bgroup
1409Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1412@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1414
252b5132
RH
1415@kindex -Bstatic
1416@kindex -dn
1417@kindex -non_shared
1418@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1419@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1420@itemx -dn
1421@itemx -non_shared
1422@itemx -static
1423Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1427library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1428option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1432libraries.
252b5132
RH
1433
1434@kindex -Bsymbolic
1435@item -Bsymbolic
1436When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1439within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1440@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1441executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1442the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1443support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1444
40b36307
L
1445@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1446@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1447When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1448symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1449This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1450when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1451to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1452This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1453libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1454
55255dae
L
1455@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1457Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1458typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1459global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1460within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1461to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1462in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1463which support shared libraries.
1464
1465The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1466scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1467
40b36307
L
1468@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1469@item --dynamic-list-data
1470Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1471
1472@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1474Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1475is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1476
0b8a70d9
L
1477@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1479Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1480
252b5132
RH
1481@kindex --check-sections
1482@kindex --no-check-sections
1483@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1484@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1485Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1486been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1487perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1488suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1489allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1490restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1491Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1492force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1493option.
252b5132 1494
ddbb8a31
NC
1495@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1496@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1497@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1498@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1499This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1500by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1501command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1502output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1503input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1504specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1505follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1506behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1507
1508This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1509libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1510mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1511their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1512required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1513the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1514dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1515symbols.
1516
252b5132
RH
1517@cindex cross reference table
1518@kindex --cref
1519@item --cref
1520Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1521generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1522Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1523
1524The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1525easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1526sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1527symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1528definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1529where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1530symbol are listed.
252b5132 1531
4818e05f
AM
1532@cindex common allocation
1533@kindex --no-define-common
1534@item --no-define-common
1535This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1536The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1537@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1538
1539The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1540the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1541of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1542forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1543Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1544from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1545This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1546and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1547duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1548paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1549
7bdf4127
AB
1550@cindex group allocation in linker script
1551@cindex section groups
1552@cindex COMDAT
1553@kindex --force-group-allocation
1554@item --force-group-allocation
1555This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1556normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1557default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1558change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1559command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1560effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1561
252b5132 1562@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1563@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1564@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1565Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1566address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1567times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1568limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1569context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1570symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1571constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1572using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1573@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1574equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1575
1576@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1577@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1578@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1579@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1580@itemx --no-demangle
1581These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1582and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1583present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1584underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1585mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1586different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1587to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1588demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1589is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1590
1591@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1592@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1594@item -I@var{file}
1595@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1596Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1597generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1598linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1599doing.
1600
9b8b325a
RF
1601@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1602@item --no-dynamic-linker
1603When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1604linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1605executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1606entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1607
a70f34c0
NC
1608@kindex --embedded-relocs
1609@item --embedded-relocs
1610This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1611that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1612is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1613targets.
1614
3f0a5f17
ME
1615@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1617Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1618in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1619
7ce691ae 1620@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1621@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1622@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1623@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1624Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1625with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1626
252b5132
RH
1627@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1628@item --force-exe-suffix
1629Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1630
1631If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1632@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1633the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1634option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1635Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1636it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1637
1638@kindex --gc-sections
1639@kindex --no-gc-sections
1640@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1641@item --gc-sections
1642@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1643Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1644targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1645performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1646@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1647collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1648implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1649
d5465ba2
AM
1650@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1651examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1652symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1653command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1654referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1655libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1656referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1657the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1658relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1659@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1660
ac69cbc6 1661This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1662@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1663specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1664@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1665command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1666
c17d87de
NC
1667@kindex --print-gc-sections
1668@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1669@cindex garbage collection
1670@item --print-gc-sections
1671@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1672List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1673printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1674collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1675default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1676be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1677line.
1678
22185505 1679@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1680@cindex garbage collection
1681@item --gc-keep-exported
1682When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1683collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1684default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1685executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1686collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1687Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1688it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1689ELF format targets.
1690
30824704
RM
1691@kindex --print-output-format
1692@cindex output format
1693@item --print-output-format
1694Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1695other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1696in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1697
3604cb1f
TG
1698@kindex --print-memory-usage
1699@cindex memory usage
1700@item --print-memory-usage
1701Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1702the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1703quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1704headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1705parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1706
1707@smallexample
1708Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1709 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1710 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1711@end smallexample
1712
252b5132
RH
1713@cindex help
1714@cindex usage
1715@kindex --help
1716@item --help
1717Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1718
ea20a7da
CC
1719@kindex --target-help
1720@item --target-help
a094d01f 1721Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1722
2509a395
SL
1723@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1725Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1726@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1727
1728@cindex memory usage
1729@kindex --no-keep-memory
1730@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1731@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1732symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1733instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1734necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1735while linking a large executable.
1736
1737@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1738@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1739@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1740@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1741@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1742Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1743is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1744The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1745behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1746libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1747
97a232d7
NC
1748The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1749
aa713662
L
1750@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1751@kindex -z muldefs
1752@item --allow-multiple-definition
1753@itemx -z muldefs
1754Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1755report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1756first definition will be used.
1757
b79e8c78 1758@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1759@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1760@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1761@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1762Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1763This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1764determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1765shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1766how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1767
903249d7
NC
1768The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1769referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1770an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1771a shared library.
1772
1773The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1774libraries specified at link time are that:
1775
1776@itemize @bullet
1777@item
1778A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1779that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1780resolvable at load time.
1781@item
1782There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1783symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1784
1785The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1786select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1787architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1788appropriate memset function.
1789@end itemize
b79e8c78 1790
31941635
L
1791@kindex --no-undefined-version
1792@item --no-undefined-version
1793Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1794it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1795will be issued instead.
1796
3e3b46e5
PB
1797@kindex --default-symver
1798@item --default-symver
1799Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1800exported symbols.
1801
1802@kindex --default-imported-symver
1803@item --default-imported-symver
1804Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1805imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1806
252b5132
RH
1807@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1808@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1809Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1810files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1811been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1812This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1813errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1814have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1815inappropriate.
1816
fe7929ce
AM
1817@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1819Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1820library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1821
252b5132
RH
1822@kindex --no-whole-archive
1823@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1824Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1825archive files.
1826
1827@cindex output file after errors
1828@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1829@item --noinhibit-exec
1830Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1831Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1832errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1833when it issues any error whatsoever.
1834
0a9c1c8e
CD
1835@kindex -nostdlib
1836@item -nostdlib
1837Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1838command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1839(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1840
252b5132 1841@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1842@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1844@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1845file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1846@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1847object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1848object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1849should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1850usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1851name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1852list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1853command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1854this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1855@end ifclear
1856
76359541
TP
1857@kindex --out-implib
1858@item --out-implib @var{file}
1859Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1860the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1861library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1862may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1863behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1864step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1865the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1866
36af4a4e
JJ
1867@kindex -pie
1868@kindex --pic-executable
1869@item -pie
1870@itemx --pic-executable
1871@cindex position independent executables
1872Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1873ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1874libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1875address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1876normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1877defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1878
252b5132
RH
1879@kindex -qmagic
1880@item -qmagic
1881This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1882
1883@kindex -Qy
1884@item -Qy
1885This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1886
1887@kindex --relax
1888@cindex synthesizing linker
1889@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1890@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1891@item --relax
28d5f677 1892@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1893An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1894@ifset GENERIC
1895This option is only supported on a few targets.
1896@end ifset
1897@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1898@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1899@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1900@ifset XTENSA
1901@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1902@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1903@ifset M68HC11
1904@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1905@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1906@ifset NIOSII
1907@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1908@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1909@ifset POWERPC
1910@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1911@end ifset
252b5132 1912
a094d01f 1913On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1914global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1915addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1916synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1917instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1918
1919On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1920debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1921@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1922This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1923family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1924@end ifset
1925
1926@ifset GENERIC
1927On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1928but ignored.
1929@end ifset
1930
28d5f677
NC
1931On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1932@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1933
252b5132
RH
1934@cindex retaining specified symbols
1935@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1936@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1937@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1939Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1940discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1941symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1942@ifset GENERIC
1943(such as VxWorks)
1944@end ifset
1945where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1946run-time memory.
1947
1948@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1949or symbols needed for relocations.
1950
1951You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1952line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1953
1954@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1955@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1956@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1957@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1958Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1959linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1960arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1961them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1962
1963The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1964are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1965description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1966in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1967have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1968
1969If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1970contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1971is defined.
252b5132 1972
ff5dcc92 1973The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1974SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1975@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1976runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1977options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1978gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1979file systems.
252b5132 1980
ff5dcc92 1981For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1982followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1983the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1984@end ifset
1985
1986@ifset GENERIC
1987@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1988@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1989@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1990When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1991happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1992of the input files.
1993
1994When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1995non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1996shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1997explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1998specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1999@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2000either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2001appearing multiple times.
2002
e680a6b6
NC
2003The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2004directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2005containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2006and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200764-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2008
2009The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2010@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2011supported.
2012
28c309a2
NC
2013This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2014that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2015is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2016runtime linker would do.
2017
252b5132 2018The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2019libraries:
252b5132
RH
2020@enumerate
2021@item
ff5dcc92 2022Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2023@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2024Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2025between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2026specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2027used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2028at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2029by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2030the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2031@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2032On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2033@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2034environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2035@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2036On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2037directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2038@item
a1b8d843 2039For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2040variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2041@item
ec4eb78a
L
2042For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2043@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2044libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2045@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2046@item
252b5132
RH
2047The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2048@item
2049For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2050exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2051@end enumerate
2052
2053If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2054warning and continue with the link.
2055@end ifset
2056
2057@kindex -shared
2058@kindex -Bshareable
2059@item -shared
2060@itemx -Bshareable
2061@cindex shared libraries
2062Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2063and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2064shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2065undefined symbols in the link.
2066
252b5132 2067@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2068@item --sort-common
2069@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2070@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2071This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2072ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2073sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2074eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2075between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2076specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2077
2509a395
SL
2078@kindex --sort-section=name
2079@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2080This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2081patterns in the linker script.
2082
2509a395
SL
2083@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2084@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2085This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2086patterns in the linker script.
2087
a70f34c0
NC
2088@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2089@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2090This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2091.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2092post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2093
252b5132 2094@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2095@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2096Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2097each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2098size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2099
2100@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2101@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2102Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2103output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2104This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2105certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2106cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2107that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2108support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2109input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2110more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2111many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2112
2113@kindex --stats
2114@item --stats
2115Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2116as execution time and memory usage.
2117
2509a395 2118@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2119@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2120Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2121configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2122that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2123
a70f34c0
NC
2124@kindex --task-link
2125@item --task-link
2126This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2127file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2128
252b5132
RH
2129@kindex --traditional-format
2130@cindex traditional format
2131@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2132For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2133the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2134use the traditional format instead.
2135
2136@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2137For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2138symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2139full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2140@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2141trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2142combine duplicate entries.
2143
2509a395
SL
2144@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2145@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2146Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2147address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2148times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2149line.
2150@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2151for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2152@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2153should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2154sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2155
2509a395
SL
2156@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2157@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2158@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2159@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2160@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2161@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2162@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2163Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2164@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2165
2509a395
SL
2166@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2167@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2168@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2169When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2170byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2171
9d5777a3
RM
2172@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2173@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2174@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2175When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2176the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2177text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2178
0d705e9f
AM
2179@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2180@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2181@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2182When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2183model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2184
560e09e9
NC
2185@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2186@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2187Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2188values for @samp{method}:
2189
2190@table @samp
2191@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2192Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2193
2194@item report-all
da8bce14 2195Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2196
2197@item ignore-in-object-files
2198Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2199ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2200
2201@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2202Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2203ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2204when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2205libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2206command line.
2207@end table
2208
2209The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2210by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2211
2212Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2213unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2214can change this to a warning.
2215
1715a13c
L
2216@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2217@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2218@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2219@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2220Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2221supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2222the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2223argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2224
2225@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2226@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2227@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2228Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2229used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2230about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2231is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2232see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2233use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2234symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2235@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2236
7ce691ae 2237@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2238@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2239@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2240@item --warn-common
2241Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2242a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2243but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2244you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2245Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2246warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2247
2248There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2249
2250@table @samp
2251@item int i = 1;
2252A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2253file.
2254
2255@item extern int i;
2256An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2257There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2258variable somewhere.
2259
2260@item int i;
2261A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2262variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2263The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2264single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2265size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2266a definition of the same variable.
2267@end table
2268
2269The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2270Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2271just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2272encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2273a common symbol.
2274
2275@enumerate
2276@item
2277Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2278definition for the symbol.
2279@smallexample
2280@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2281 overridden by definition
2282@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2283@end smallexample
2284
2285@item
2286Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2287the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2288except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2289@smallexample
2290@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2291 overriding common
2292@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2293@end smallexample
2294
2295@item
2296Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2297@smallexample
2298@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2299 of `@var{symbol}'
2300@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2301@end smallexample
2302
2303@item
2304Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2305@smallexample
2306@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2307 overridden by larger common
2308@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2309@end smallexample
2310
2311@item
2312Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2313the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2314encountered in a different order.
2315@smallexample
2316@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2317 overriding smaller common
2318@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2319@end smallexample
2320@end enumerate
2321
2322@kindex --warn-constructors
2323@item --warn-constructors
2324Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2325object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2326detect the use of global constructors.
2327
2328@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2329@item --warn-multiple-gp
2330Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2331This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2332Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2333section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2334of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2335base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2336base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2337bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2338large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2339values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2340option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2341
2342@kindex --warn-once
2343@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2344@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2345@item --warn-once
2346Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2347which refers to it.
2348
2349@kindex --warn-section-align
2350@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2351@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2352@item --warn-section-align
2353Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2354alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2355The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2356is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2357the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2358
8fdd7217
NC
2359@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2360@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2361Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2362
a0c402a5
L
2363@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2364@item --warn-alternate-em
2365Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2366
560e09e9
NC
2367@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2368@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2369If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2370@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2371This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2372
2373@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2374@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2375This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2376it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2377
252b5132
RH
2378@kindex --whole-archive
2379@cindex including an entire archive
2380@item --whole-archive
2381For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2382@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2383in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2384files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2385library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2386library. This option may be used more than once.
2387
7ec229ce 2388Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2389about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2390Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2391list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2392your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2393
2509a395
SL
2394@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2395@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2396Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2397@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2398undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2399@var{symbol}.
2400
2401This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2402wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2403wishes to call the system function, it should call
2404@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2405
2406Here is a trivial example:
2407
2408@smallexample
2409void *
cc2f008e 2410__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2411@{
cc2f008e 2412 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2413 return __real_malloc (c);
2414@}
2415@end smallexample
2416
ff5dcc92 2417If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2418all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2419instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2420call the real @code{malloc} function.
2421
2422You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2423links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2424you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2425file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2426call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2427
4ea904ed
SH
2428Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2429internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2430@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2431@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2432
2433@smallexample
2434int
2435f (void)
2436@{
2437 return 123;
2438@}
2439
2440int
2441g (void)
2442@{
2443 return f();
2444@}
2445@end smallexample
2446
6aa29e7b 2447@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2448@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2449@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2450@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2451Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2452(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2453section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2454
e41b3a13
JJ
2455@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2456@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2457Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2458generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2459if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2460
6c1439be
L
2461@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2462@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2463@item --enable-new-dtags
2464@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2465This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2466systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2467@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2468and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2469If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2470created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2471those options are only available for ELF systems.
2472
2d643429 2473@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2474@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2475Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2476close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2477time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2478increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2479value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2480
fdc90cb4
JJ
2481@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2482@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2483Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2484@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2485new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2486the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2487hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2488but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2489
0ce398f1
L
2490@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2491@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2492@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2493@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2494@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2495@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2496@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2497@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2498On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2499compressed using zlib.
2500
2501@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2502sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2503DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2504instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2505also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2506sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2507
2508The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2509@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2510
2511Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2512sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2513for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2514uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2515
2516The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2517involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2518default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2519@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2520
35835446
JR
2521@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2522@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2523This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2524linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2525for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2526about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2527
4f9c04f7 2528Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25291021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2530run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2531has been used.
2532
2533The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2534enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2535
c0065db7
RM
2536@kindex --build-id
2537@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2538@item --build-id
2539@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2540Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2541or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2542unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2543@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2544@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2545@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2546the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2547string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2548@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2549is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2550
2551The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2552that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2553unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2554to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2555file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2556string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2557
2558Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2559@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2560@end table
2561
0285c67d
NC
2562@c man end
2563
36f63dca 2564@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2565
0285c67d
NC
2566@c man begin OPTIONS
2567
ff5dcc92 2568The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2569the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2570normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2571use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2572@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2573like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2574symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2575object file).
2576
2577In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2578support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2579PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2580values by either a space or an equals sign.
2581
ff5dcc92 2582@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2585@item --add-stdcall-alias
2586If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2587as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2589
2590@kindex --base-file
2591@item --base-file @var{file}
2592Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2593addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2594@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2595[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2596
2597@kindex --dll
2598@item --dll
2599Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2600@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2601file.
bb10df36 2602[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2603
88183869
DK
2604@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2605@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2606@item --enable-long-section-names
2607@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2608The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2609the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2610for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2611fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2612to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2613allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2614disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2615generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2616as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2617with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2618GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2619information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2620option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2621section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2622when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2623image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2624[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2625
252b5132
RH
2626@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2627@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2628@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2629@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2630If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2631do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2632only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2633resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2634undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2635@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2636to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2637warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2638import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2639to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2640feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2641@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2642mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2643[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2644
522f09cd
KT
2645@kindex --leading-underscore
2646@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2647@item --leading-underscore
2648@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2649For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2650in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2651disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2652
252b5132
RH
2653@cindex DLLs, creating
2654@kindex --export-all-symbols
2655@item --export-all-symbols
2656If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2657be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2658otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2659explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2660attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2661option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2662@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2663@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2664exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2665re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2666such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2667@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2668@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2669Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2670not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2671extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2672(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2673These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2674@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2675@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2676@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2677@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2679
2680@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2681@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2682Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2683exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2684[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2685
2927aaca
NC
2686@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2687@item --exclude-all-symbols
2688Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2690
252b5132
RH
2691@kindex --file-alignment
2692@item --file-alignment
2693Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2694file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2695512.
bb10df36 2696[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2697
2698@cindex heap size
2699@kindex --heap
2700@item --heap @var{reserve}
2701@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2702Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2703to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2704committed.
bb10df36 2705[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2706
2707@cindex image base
2708@kindex --image-base
2709@item --image-base @var{value}
2710Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2711the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2712is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2713your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2714other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2715for dlls.
bb10df36 2716[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2717
2718@kindex --kill-at
2719@item --kill-at
2720If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2721symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2722[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2723
26d2d8a2
BF
2724@kindex --large-address-aware
2725@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2726If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2727header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2728greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2729or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2730section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2731[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2732
f69a2f97
NC
2733@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2734@item --disable-large-address-aware
2735Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2736This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2737driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2738addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2739[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2740
252b5132
RH
2741@kindex --major-image-version
2742@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2743Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2744[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2745
2746@kindex --major-os-version
2747@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2748Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2749[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2750
2751@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2752@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2753Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2755
2756@kindex --minor-image-version
2757@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2758Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2760
2761@kindex --minor-os-version
2762@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2763Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2765
2766@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2767@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2768Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2769[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2770
2771@cindex DEF files, creating
2772@cindex DLLs, creating
2773@kindex --output-def
2774@item --output-def @var{file}
2775The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2776file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2777(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2778library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2779automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2780[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2781
b044cda1 2782@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2783@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2784@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2785@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2786Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2787@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2788By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2789for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2790execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2791[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2792
2793@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2794@item --disable-auto-image-base
2795Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2796user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2797default.
bb10df36 2798[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2799
2800@cindex DLLs, linking to
2801@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2802@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2803When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2804search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2805@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2806between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2807uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2808@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2809[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2810
2811@kindex --enable-auto-import
2812@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2813Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2814DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2815mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2816[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2817
2818The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2819feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2820
2821Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2822of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2823PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2824
e2a83dd0
NC
2825Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2826data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2827placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2828around a problem with consts that is described here:
2829http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2830
4d8907ac
DS
2831Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2832see this message:
0d888aac 2833
ece2d90e 2834"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2835documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2836
ece2d90e
NC
2837This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2838ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2839allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2840fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2841constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2842multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2843this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2844of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2845the warning, and exit.
2846
2847There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2848data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2849
2fa9fc65
NC
2850One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2851of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2852this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2853
c0065db7
RM
2854A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2855that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2856there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2857a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2858
2859@example
2860extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2861extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2862 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2863@end example
2864
2865or
2866
2867@example
2868extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2869extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2870 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2871@end example
2872
c0065db7 2873For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2874is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2875
2876@example
2877extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2878extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2879 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2880@end example
2881
c406afaf
NC
2882or
2883
2884@example
2885extern long long extern_ll;
2886extern_ll -->
2887 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2888@end example
2889
2fa9fc65 2890A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2891'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2892@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2893requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2894building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2895merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2896between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2897constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2898
2899Original:
2900@example
2901--foo.h
2902extern int arr[];
2903--foo.c
2904#include "foo.h"
2905void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2906 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2907@}
2908@end example
2909
2910Solution 1:
2911@example
2912--foo.h
2913extern int arr[];
2914--foo.c
2915#include "foo.h"
2916void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2917 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2918 volatile int *parr = arr;
2919 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2920@}
2921@end example
2922
2923Solution 2:
2924@example
2925--foo.h
2926/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2927#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2928 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2929#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2930#else
2931#define FOO_IMPORT
2932#endif
2933extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2934--foo.c
2935#include "foo.h"
2936void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2937 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2938@}
2939@end example
2940
c0065db7 2941A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2942library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2943for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2944functions).
b044cda1
CW
2945
2946@kindex --disable-auto-import
2947@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2948Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2949@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2950[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2951
2fa9fc65
NC
2952@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2953@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2954If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2955that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2956a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2957environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2958[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2959
2960@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2961@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2962Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2963[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2964
b044cda1
CW
2965@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2966@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2967Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2968[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2969
252b5132
RH
2970@kindex --section-alignment
2971@item --section-alignment
2972Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2973addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2974[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2975
2976@cindex stack size
2977@kindex --stack
2978@item --stack @var{reserve}
2979@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2980Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2981to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2982committed.
bb10df36 2983[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2984
2985@kindex --subsystem
2986@item --subsystem @var{which}
2987@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2988@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2989Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2990legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2991@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2992the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2993@var{which}.
bb10df36 2994[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2995
2f563b51
DK
2996The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2997of the PE file header:
2998[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2999
2d5c3743
NC
3000@kindex --high-entropy-va
3001@item --high-entropy-va
3002Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3003(ASLR).
3004
2f563b51
DK
3005@kindex --dynamicbase
3006@item --dynamicbase
3007The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3008randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3009Vista for i386 PE targets.
3010
3011@kindex --forceinteg
3012@item --forceinteg
3013Code integrity checks are enforced.
3014
3015@kindex --nxcompat
3016@item --nxcompat
3017The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3018This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3019
3020@kindex --no-isolation
3021@item --no-isolation
3022Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3023
3024@kindex --no-seh
3025@item --no-seh
3026The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3027this image.
3028
3029@kindex --no-bind
3030@item --no-bind
3031Do not bind this image.
3032
3033@kindex --wdmdriver
3034@item --wdmdriver
3035The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3036
2f563b51
DK
3037@kindex --tsaware
3038@item --tsaware
3039The image is Terminal Server aware.
3040
0cb112f7
CF
3041@kindex --insert-timestamp
3042@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3043@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3044Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3045as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3046other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3047will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3048same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3049can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3050that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3051identically.
252b5132
RH
3052@end table
3053
0285c67d
NC
3054@c man end
3055
ac145307
BS
3056@ifset C6X
3057@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3058
3059@c man begin OPTIONS
3060
3061The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3062libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3063all executables use an index of 0.
3064
3065@table @gcctabopt
3066
3067@kindex --dsbt-size
3068@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3069This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3070or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3071entries.
3072
3073@kindex --dsbt-index
3074@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3075This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3076to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3077executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3078@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3079
fbd9ad90
PB
3080@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3081The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3082exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3083
ac145307
BS
3084@end table
3085
3086@c man end
3087@end ifset
3088
b8891f8d
AJ
3089@ifset CSKY
3090@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3091
3092@c man begin OPTIONS
3093
3094@table @gcctabopt
3095
3096@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3097@item --branch-stub
3098This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3099sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3100usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3101can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3102the compiler or assembler.
3103
3104@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3105@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3106This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3107It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3108be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3109stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3110sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3111@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3112linker should choose suitable defaults.
3113
3114@end table
3115
3116@c man end
3117@end ifset
3118
93fd0973
SC
3119@ifset M68HC11
3120@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3121
3122@c man begin OPTIONS
3123
3124The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3125memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3126
3127@table @gcctabopt
3128
3129@kindex --no-trampoline
3130@item --no-trampoline
3131This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3132is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3133instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3134
3135@kindex --bank-window
3136@item --bank-window @var{name}
3137This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3138the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3139The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3140paging and addresses within the memory window.
3141
3142@end table
3143
3144@c man end
3145@end ifset
3146
7fb9f789
NC
3147@ifset M68K
3148@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3149
3150@c man begin OPTIONS
3151
3152The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3153when linking for 68K targets.
3154
3155@table @gcctabopt
3156
3157@kindex --got
3158@item --got=@var{type}
3159This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3160@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3161@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3162Info entry for @file{ld}.
3163
3164@end table
3165
3166@c man end
3167@end ifset
3168
833794fc
MR
3169@ifset MIPS
3170@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3171
3172@c man begin OPTIONS
3173
3174The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3175generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3176linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3177
3178@table @gcctabopt
3179
3180@kindex --insn32
3181@item --insn32
3182@kindex --no-insn32
3183@itemx --no-insn32
3184These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3185generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3186or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
318732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3188used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3189possible.
3190
8b10b0b3
MR
3191@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3192@item --ignore-branch-isa
3193@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3194@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3195These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3196transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3197accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3198is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3199instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3200equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3201calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3202a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3203an error.
3204
3734320d
MF
3205@kindex --compact-branches
3206@item --compact-branches
3207@kindex --no-compact-branches
3208@item --compact-branches
3209These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3210in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3211
833794fc
MR
3212@end table
3213
3214@c man end
3215@end ifset
3216
252b5132
RH
3217@ifset UsesEnvVars
3218@node Environment
3219@section Environment Variables
3220
0285c67d
NC
3221@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3222
560e09e9 3223You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3224@ifclear SingleFormat
3225@code{GNUTARGET},
3226@end ifclear
3227@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3228
36f63dca 3229@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3230@kindex GNUTARGET
3231@cindex default input format
3232@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3233use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3234of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3235@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3236of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3237attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3238this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3239there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3240object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3241BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3242in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3243@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3244
3245@kindex LDEMULATION
3246@cindex default emulation
3247@cindex emulation, default
3248@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3249@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3250behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3251available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3252the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3253variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3254linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3255
3256@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3257@cindex demangling, default
3258Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3259@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3260default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3261a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3262may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3263options.
3264
0285c67d
NC
3265@c man end
3266@end ifset
3267
252b5132
RH
3268@node Scripts
3269@chapter Linker Scripts
3270
3271@cindex scripts
3272@cindex linker scripts
3273@cindex command files
3274Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3275written in the linker command language.
3276
3277The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3278the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3279the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3280more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3281direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3282described below.
3283
3284The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3285yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3286linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3287to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3288such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3289
3290You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3291line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3292default linker script.
3293
3294You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3295to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3296Linker Scripts}.
3297
3298@menu
3299* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3300* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3301* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3302* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3303* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3304* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3305* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3306* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3307* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3308* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3309* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3310@end menu
3311
3312@node Basic Script Concepts
3313@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3314@cindex linker script concepts
3315We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3316describe the linker script language.
3317
3318The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3319file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3320@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3321The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3322purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3323among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3324section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3325in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3326
3327Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3328also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3329contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3330the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3331A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3332area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3333loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3334which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3335of debugging information.
3336
3337Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3338first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3339the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3340@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3341section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3342same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3343is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3344(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3345based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3346RAM address would be the VMA.
3347
3348You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3349program with the @samp{-h} option.
3350
3351Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3352@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3353has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3354information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3355will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3356static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3357referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3358
3359You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3360program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3361option.
3362
3363@node Script Format
3364@section Linker Script Format
3365@cindex linker script format
3366Linker scripts are text files.
3367
3368You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3369either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3370symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3371generally ignored.
3372
3373Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3374If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3375otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3376double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3377file name.
3378
3379You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3380@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3381to whitespace.
3382
3383@node Simple Example
3384@section Simple Linker Script Example
3385@cindex linker script example
3386@cindex example of linker script
3387Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3388
3389The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3390@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3391memory layout of the output file.
3392
3393The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3394describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3395code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3396@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3397Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3398your input files.
3399
3400For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
34010x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3402linker script which will do that:
3403@smallexample
3404SECTIONS
3405@{
3406 . = 0x10000;
3407 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3408 . = 0x8000000;
3409 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3410 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3411@}
3412@end smallexample
3413
3414You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3415followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3416descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3417
252b5132
RH
3418The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3419sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3420counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3421other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3422current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3423incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3424@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3425
3426The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3427required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3428after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3429which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3430wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3431means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3432
3433Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3434@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3435@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3436
3437The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3438the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3439at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3440output section, the value of the location counter will be
3441@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3442effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3443immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3444
3445The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3446alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3447example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3448sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3449may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3450sections.
3451
3452That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3453
3454@node Simple Commands
3455@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3456@cindex linker script simple commands
3457In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3458
3459@menu
3460* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3461* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3462@ifclear SingleFormat
3463* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3464@end ifclear
3465
4a93e180 3466* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3467* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3468@end menu
3469
3470@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3471@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3472@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3473@cindex start of execution
3474@cindex first instruction
3475@cindex entry point
3476The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3477point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3478entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3479@smallexample
3480ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3481@end smallexample
3482
3483There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3484entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3485stopping when one of them succeeds:
3486@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3487@item
252b5132 3488the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3489@item
252b5132 3490the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3491@item
a094d01f 3492the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3493targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3494check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3495@item
252b5132 3496the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3497@item
252b5132
RH
3498The address @code{0}.
3499@end itemize
3500
3501@node File Commands
36f63dca 3502@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3503@cindex linker script file commands
3504Several linker script commands deal with files.
3505
3506@table @code
3507@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3508@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3509@cindex including a linker script
3510Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3511be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3512with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
351310 levels deep.
3514
4006703d
NS
3515You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3516@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3517
252b5132
RH
3518@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3519@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3520@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3521@cindex input files in linker scripts
3522@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3523@cindex linker script input object files
3524The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3525in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3526
3527For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3528a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3529then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3530
3531In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3532script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3533
e3f2db7f
AO
3534In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3535with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3536located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3537for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3538open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3539linker will search through the archive library search path.
3540The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3541as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3542path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3543@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3544
ff5dcc92 3545If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3546name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3547@samp{-l}.
3548
3549When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3550files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3551script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3552
3553@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3554@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3555@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3556@cindex grouping input files
3557The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3558files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3559new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3560in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3561
b717d30e
JJ
3562@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3563@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3564@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3565This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3566commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3567as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3568with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3569when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3570@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3571and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3572setting afterwards.
3573
252b5132
RH
3574@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3575@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3576@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3577The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3578@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3579@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3580Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3581precedence.
3582
3583You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3584output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3585
3586@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3587@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3588@cindex library search path in linker script
3589@cindex archive search path in linker script
3590@cindex search path in linker script
3591The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3592@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3593@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3594on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3595are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3596the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3597
3598@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3599@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3600@cindex first input file
3601The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3602that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3603though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3604when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3605first file.
3606@end table
3607
3608@ifclear SingleFormat
3609@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3610@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3611A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3612
3613@table @code
3614@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3615@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3616@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3617@cindex output file format in linker script
3618The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3619output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3620exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3621(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3622line option takes precedence.
3623
3624You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3625formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3626This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3627desired endianness.
3628
3629If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3630will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3631output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3632used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3633
3634For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3635command:
3636@smallexample
3637OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3638@end smallexample
3639This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3640@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3641option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3642format.
3643
3644@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3645@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3646@cindex input file format in linker script
3647The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3648files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3649This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3650(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3651is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3652command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3653@end table
3654@end ifclear
3655
4a93e180
NC
3656@node REGION_ALIAS
3657@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3658@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3659@cindex region alias
3660@cindex region names
3661
3662Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3663@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3664
3665@smallexample
3666REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3667@end smallexample
3668
3669The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3670memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3671to memory regions. An example follows.
3672
3673Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3674memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3675that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3676non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3677access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3678read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3679sections:
3680
3681@itemize @bullet
3682@item
3683@code{.text} program code;
3684@item
3685@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3686@item
3687@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3688@item
3689@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3690@end itemize
3691
3692The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3693part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3694output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3695systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3696@code{C}:
3697@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3698@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3699@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3700@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3701@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3702@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3703@end multitable
3704The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3705loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3706the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3707the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3708
3709The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3710includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3711memory layout:
3712@smallexample
3713INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3714
3715SECTIONS
3716 @{
3717 .text :
3718 @{
3719 *(.text)
3720 @} > REGION_TEXT
3721 .rodata :
3722 @{
3723 *(.rodata)
3724 rodata_end = .;
3725 @} > REGION_RODATA
3726 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3727 @{
3728 data_start = .;
3729 *(.data)
3730 @} > REGION_DATA
3731 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3732 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3733 .bss :
3734 @{
3735 *(.bss)
3736 @} > REGION_BSS
3737 @}
3738@end smallexample
3739
3740Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3741regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3742variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3743@table @code
3744@item A
3745Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3746@smallexample
3747MEMORY
3748 @{
3749 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3750 @}
3751
3752REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3753REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3754REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3755REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3756@end smallexample
3757@item B
3758Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3759into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3760@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3761@smallexample
3762MEMORY
3763 @{
3764 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3765 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3766 @}
3767
3768REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3769REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3770REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3771REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3772@end smallexample
3773@item C
3774Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3775@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3776initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3777system start into the @code{RAM}.
3778@smallexample
3779MEMORY
3780 @{
3781 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3782 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3783 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3784 @}
3785
3786REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3787REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3788REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3789REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3790@end smallexample
3791@end table
3792
3793It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3794@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3795necessary:
3796@smallexample
3797#include <string.h>
3798
3799extern char data_start [];
3800extern char data_size [];
3801extern char data_load_start [];
3802
3803void copy_data(void)
3804@{
3805 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3806 @{
3807 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3808 @}
3809@}
3810@end smallexample
3811
252b5132 3812@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3813@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3814There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3815
3816@table @code
3817@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3818@kindex ASSERT
3819@cindex assertion in linker script
3820Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3821with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3822
fd1c4238
NC
3823Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3824take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3825inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3826for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3827symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3828
3829@smallexample
3830 .stack :
3831 @{
3832 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3833 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3834 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3835 @}
3836@end smallexample
3837
3838will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3839PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3840can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3841
3842@smallexample
3843 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3844 .stack :
3845 @{
3846 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3847 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3848 @}
3849@end smallexample
3850
3851will work.
3852
252b5132
RH
3853@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3854@kindex EXTERN
3855@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3856Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3857symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3858modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3859each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3860command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3861
3862@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3863@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3864@cindex common allocation in linker script
3865This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3866to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3867output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3868
4818e05f
AM
3869@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3870@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3871@cindex common allocation in linker script
3872This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3873command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3874to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3875
7bdf4127
AB
3876@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3877@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3878@cindex group allocation in linker script
3879@cindex section groups
3880@cindex COMDAT
3881This command has the same effect as the
3882@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3883@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3884and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3885specified (@samp{-r}).
3886
53d25da6
AM
3887@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3888@kindex INSERT
3889@cindex insert user script into default script
3890This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3891augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3892inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3893@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3894default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3895sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3896linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3897insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3898linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3899default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3900of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3901to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3902is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3903
3904@smallexample
3905SECTIONS
3906@{
3907 OVERLAY :
3908 @{
3909 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3910 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3911 @}
3912@}
3913INSERT AFTER .text;
3914@end smallexample
3915
252b5132
RH
3916@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3917@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3918@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3919This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3920references among certain output sections.
3921
3922In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3923using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3924will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3925errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3926a function defined in the other section.
3927
3928The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3929@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3930an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3931@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3932names.
3933
cdf96953
MF
3934@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3935@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3936@cindex cross references
3937This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3938references to one section from a list of other sections.
3939
3940The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3941output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3942a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3943there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3944must never call back.
3945
3946The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3947The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3948If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3949the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3950status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3951names, not input section names.
3952
252b5132
RH
3953@ifclear SingleFormat
3954@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3955@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3956@cindex machine architecture
3957@cindex architecture
3958Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3959of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3960architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3961the @samp{-f} option.
3962@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3963
3964@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3965@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3966This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3967@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3968in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3969@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3970@end table
3971
3972@node Assignments
3973@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3974@cindex assignment in scripts
3975@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3976@cindex variables, defining
3977You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3978the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3979
3980@menu
3981* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3982* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3983* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3984* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3985* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3986@end menu
3987
3988@node Simple Assignments
3989@subsection Simple Assignments
3990
3991You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3992
3993@table @code
3994@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3995@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3996@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3997@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3998@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3999@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4000@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4001@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4002@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4003@end table
4004
4005The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4006@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4007defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4008
4009The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4010may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4011
4012The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4013
4014Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4015
4016You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4017statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4018section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4019
4020The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4021expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4022
4023Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4024assignments may be used:
4025
4026@smallexample
4027floating_point = 0;
4028SECTIONS
4029@{
4030 .text :
4031 @{
4032 *(.text)
4033 _etext = .;
4034 @}
156e34dd 4035 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4036 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4037@}
4038@end smallexample
4039@noindent
4040In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4041zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4042the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4043defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4044upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4045
eb8476a6
MR
4046@node HIDDEN
4047@subsection HIDDEN
4048@cindex HIDDEN
4049For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4050exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4051
4052Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4053@code{HIDDEN}:
4054
4055@smallexample
4056HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4057SECTIONS
4058@{
4059 .text :
4060 @{
4061 *(.text)
4062 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4063 @}
4064 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4065 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4066@}
4067@end smallexample
4068@noindent
4069In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4070
252b5132
RH
4071@node PROVIDE
4072@subsection PROVIDE
4073@cindex PROVIDE
4074In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4075only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4076the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4077@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4078@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4079@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4080@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4081@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4082
4083Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4084@smallexample
4085SECTIONS
4086@{
4087 .text :
4088 @{
4089 *(.text)
4090 _etext = .;
4091 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4092 @}
4093@}
4094@end smallexample
4095
4096In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4097underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4098the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4099underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4100If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4101linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4102
b0daac83
NC
4103Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4104defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4105that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4106when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4107@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4108
7af8e998
L
4109@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4110@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4111@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4112Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4113hidden and won't be exported.
4114
73ae6183
NC
4115@node Source Code Reference
4116@subsection Source Code Reference
4117
4118Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4119intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4120a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4121symbol that does not have a value.
4122
4123Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4124transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4125stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4126prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4127mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4128of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4129variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4130linker script variable might be referred to as:
4131
4132@smallexample
4133 extern int foo;
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4137
4138@smallexample
4139 _foo = 1000;
4140@end smallexample
4141
4142In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4143transformation has taken place.
4144
4145When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4146things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4147in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4148second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4149table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4150contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4151value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4152
4153@smallexample
4154 int foo = 1000;
4155@end smallexample
4156
10bf6894 4157creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4158holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4159number 1000 is initially stored.
4160
4161When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4162first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4163memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4164So:
4165
4166@smallexample
4167 foo = 1;
4168@end smallexample
4169
4170looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4171associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4172address. Whereas:
4173
4174@smallexample
4175 int * a = & foo;
4176@end smallexample
4177
10bf6894 4178looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4179and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4180the variable @samp{a}.
4181
4182Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4183the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4184an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4185
4186@smallexample
4187 foo = 1000;
4188@end smallexample
4189
4190creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4191the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4192address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4193linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4194access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4195
4196Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4197you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4198use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4199section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4200linker script contains these declarations:
4201
4202@smallexample
4203@group
4204 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4205 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4206 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4207@end group
4208@end smallexample
4209
4210Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4211
4212@smallexample
4213@group
4214 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4215
73ae6183
NC
4216 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4217@end group
4218@end smallexample
4219
4220Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4221Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4222arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4223
4224@smallexample
4225@group
4226 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4227
4228 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4229@end group
4230@end smallexample
4231
4232Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4233operators.
73ae6183 4234
252b5132 4235@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4236@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4237@kindex SECTIONS
4238The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4239into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4240
4241The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4242@smallexample
4243SECTIONS
4244@{
4245 @var{sections-command}
4246 @var{sections-command}
4247 @dots{}
4248@}
4249@end smallexample
4250
4251Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4252
4253@itemize @bullet
4254@item
4255an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4256@item
4257a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4258@item
4259an output section description
4260@item
4261an overlay description
4262@end itemize
4263
4264The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4265@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4266those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4267understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4268the layout of the output file.
4269
4270Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4271below.
4272
4273If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4274linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4275section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4276input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4277example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4278in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4279
4280@menu
4281* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4282* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4283* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4284* Input Section:: Input section description
4285* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4286* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4287* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4288* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4289* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4290@end menu
4291
4292@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4293@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4294The full description of an output section looks like this:
4295@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4296@group
7e7d5768 4297@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4298 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4299 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4300 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4301 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4302 @{
4303 @var{output-section-command}
4304 @var{output-section-command}
4305 @dots{}
abc9061b 4306 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4307@end group
4308@end smallexample
4309
4310Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4311
4312The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4313name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4314The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4315the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4316The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4317
4318Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4319
4320@itemize @bullet
4321@item
4322a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4323@item
4324an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4325@item
4326data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4327@item
4328a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4329@end itemize
4330
4331@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4332@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4333@cindex name, section
4334@cindex section name
4335The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4336meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4337support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4338must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4339example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4340output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4341names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4342quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4343characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4344commas must be quoted.
4345
4346The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4347Discarding}.
4348
4349@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4350@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4351@cindex address, section
4352@cindex section address
4353The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4354address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4355is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4356
4357If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4358section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4359to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4360alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4361contained within the output section.
4362
4363The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4364
4365@itemize @bullet
4366@item
4367If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4368is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4369in that region.
4370
4371@item
4372If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4373regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4374section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4375be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4376
4377@item
4378If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4379the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4380counter.
4381@end itemize
4382
4383@noindent
4384For example:
4385
252b5132
RH
4386@smallexample
4387.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4388@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4389
252b5132
RH
4390@noindent
4391and
ea5cae92 4392
252b5132
RH
4393@smallexample
4394.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4395@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4396
252b5132
RH
4397@noindent
4398are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4399@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4400counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4401counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4402input sections.
252b5132
RH
4403
4404The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4405For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4406so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4407do something like this:
4408@smallexample
4409.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4410@end smallexample
4411@noindent
4412This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4413aligned upward to the specified value.
4414
4415Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4416location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4417sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4418
4419@node Input Section
36f63dca 4420@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4421@cindex input sections
4422@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4423The most common output section command is an input section description.
4424
4425The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4426You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4427in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4428map the input files into your memory layout.
4429
4430@menu
4431* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4432* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4433* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4434* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4435* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4436@end menu
4437
4438@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4439@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4440@cindex input section basics
4441An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4442by a list of section names in parentheses.
4443
4444The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4445describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4446
4447The most common input section description is to include all input
4448sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4449include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4450@smallexample
4451*(.text)
4452@end smallexample
4453@noindent
18625d54 4454Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4455@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4456of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4457match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4458example:
252b5132 4459@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4460EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4461@end smallexample
4462@noindent
4463will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4464and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4465placed inside the section list, for example:
4466@smallexample
b4346c09 4467*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4468@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4469@noindent
4470The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4471two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4472more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4473
4474There are two ways to include more than one section:
4475@smallexample
4476*(.text .rdata)
4477*(.text) *(.rdata)
4478@end smallexample
4479@noindent
4480The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4481@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4482first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4483they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4484@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4485@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4486
8f1732fc
AB
4487When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4488is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4489immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4490@smallexample
4491*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4492@end smallexample
4493@noindent
4494will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4495@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4496from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4497exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4498could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4499@smallexample
4500*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4501@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4502@noindent
4503Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4504before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4505all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4506@smallexample
4507EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4508@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4509
252b5132
RH
4510You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4511You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4512needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4513@smallexample
4514data.o(.data)
4515@end smallexample
4516
ae17ab41
CM
4517To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4518of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4519
4520Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4521
4522@smallexample
4523@group
4524SECTIONS @{
4525 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4526 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4527@}
4528@end group
4529@end smallexample
4530
4531In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4532input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4533@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4534@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4535whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4536
967928e9
AM
4537You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4538matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4539with no whitespace around the colon.
4540
4541@table @samp
4542@item archive:file
4543matches file within archive
4544@item archive:
4545matches the whole archive
4546@item :file
4547matches file but not one in an archive
4548@end table
4549
4550Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4551wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4552single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4553@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4554within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4555also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4556other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4557from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4558command.
4559
252b5132
RH
4560If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4561the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4562commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4563@smallexample
4564data.o
4565@end smallexample
4566
967928e9
AM
4567When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4568and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4569characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4570name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4571did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4572though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4573@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4574the archive search path.
4575
4576@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4577@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4578@cindex input section wildcards
4579@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4580@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4581@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4582In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4583name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4584
4585The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4586pattern for the file name.
4587
4588The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4589
4590@table @samp
4591@item *
4592matches any number of characters
4593@item ?
4594matches any single character
4595@item [@var{chars}]
4596matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4597character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4598@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4599@item \
4600quotes the following character
4601@end table
4602
4603When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4604will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4605Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4606exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4607@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4608a @samp{/} character.
4609
4610File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4611specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4612does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4613
4614If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4615appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4616will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4617sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4618@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4619@smallexample
4620.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4621.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4622@end smallexample
4623
bcaa7b3e 4624@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4625Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4626in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4627this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4628pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4629@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4630into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4631
bcaa7b3e
L
4632@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4633@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4634difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4635descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4636Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4637reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4638
02ecc8e9
L
4639@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4640@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4641difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4642ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4643encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4644
bcaa7b3e
L
4645@cindex SORT
4646@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4647
4648When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4649can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4650
4651@enumerate
4652@item
4653@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4654It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4655sections have the same name.
4656@item
4657@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4658It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4659sections have the same alignment.
4660@item
c0065db7 4661@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4662treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4663@item
4664@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4665is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4666@item
4667All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4668@end enumerate
4669
a05a5b64 4670When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4671section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4672takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4673
4674If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4675command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4676treated as nested sorting command.
4677
4678@enumerate
4679@item
4680@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4681@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4682@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4683@item
4684@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4685@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4686@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4687@end enumerate
4688
4689If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4690command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4691
eda680f8 4692@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4693@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4694section sorting option.
4695
252b5132
RH
4696If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4697@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4698precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4699
4700This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4701files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4702sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4703The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4704with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4705linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4706@smallexample
4707@group
4708SECTIONS @{
4709 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4710 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4711 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4712 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4713@}
4714@end group
4715@end smallexample
4716
4717@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4718@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4719@cindex common symbol placement
4720@cindex uninitialized data placement
4721A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4722file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4723linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4724named @samp{COMMON}.
4725
4726You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4727other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4728particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4729input files are placed in another section.
4730
4731In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4732@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4733@smallexample
4734.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4735@end smallexample
4736
4737@cindex scommon section
4738@cindex small common symbols
4739Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4740example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4741symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4742different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4743the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4744symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4745to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4746locations.
4747
4748@cindex [COMMON]
4749You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4750notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4751@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4752
4753@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4754@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4755@cindex KEEP
4756@cindex garbage collection
4757When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4758it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4759This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4760with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4761@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4762
4763@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4764@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4765The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4766to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4767start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4768@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4769follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4770@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4771@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4772All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4773files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4774
4775@smallexample
4776@group
4777SECTIONS @{
4778 outputa 0x10000 :
4779 @{
4780 all.o
4781 foo.o (.input1)
4782 @}
36f63dca
NC
4783@end group
4784@group
252b5132
RH
4785 outputb :
4786 @{
4787 foo.o (.input2)
4788 foo1.o (.input1)
4789 @}
36f63dca
NC
4790@end group
4791@group
252b5132
RH
4792 outputc :
4793 @{
4794 *(.input1)
4795 *(.input2)
4796 @}
4797@}
4798@end group
a1ab1d2a 4799@end smallexample
252b5132 4800
cbd0eecf
L
4801If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4802and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4803automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4804__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4805indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4806respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4807C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4808
252b5132 4809@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4810@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4811@cindex data
4812@cindex section data
4813@cindex output section data
4814@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4815@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4816@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4817@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4818@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4819You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4820@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4821an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4822parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4823value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4824counter.
4825
4826The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4827store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4828bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4829stored.
4830
4831For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4832of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4833@smallexample
4834BYTE(1)
4835LONG(addr)
4836@end smallexample
4837
4838When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4839same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4840target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4841@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4842@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4843
4844If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4845which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4846When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4847true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4848endianness of the first input object file.
4849
36f63dca 4850Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4851between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4852@smallexample
4853SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4854@end smallexample
4855whereas this will work:
4856@smallexample
4857SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4858@end smallexample
4859
252b5132
RH
4860@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4861@cindex holes, filling
4862@cindex unspecified memory
4863You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4864current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4865otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4866gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4867with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4868necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4869point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4870than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4871different parts of an output section.
4872
4873This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4874value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4875@smallexample
563e308f 4876FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4877@end smallexample
4878
4879The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4880section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4881part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4882entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4883precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4884expression.
252b5132
RH
4885
4886@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4887@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4888There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4889commands.
4890
4891@table @code
4892@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4893@cindex input filename symbols
4894@cindex filename symbols
4895@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4896The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4897The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4898file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4899the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4900
4901This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4902normally used for any other object file format.
4903
4904@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4905@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4906@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4907@item CONSTRUCTORS
4908When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4909unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4910destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4911arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4912automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4913For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4914linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4915@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4916ignored for other object file formats.
4917
4918The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4919constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4920Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4921the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4922first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4923of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4924compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4925formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4926@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4927the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4928destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4929@code{exit}.
4930
4931For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4932arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4933addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4934and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4935linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4936runtime code expects to see.
4937
4938@smallexample
4939 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4940 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4941 *(.ctors)
4942 LONG(0)
4943 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4944 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4945 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4946 *(.dtors)
4947 LONG(0)
4948 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4949@end smallexample
4950
4951If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4952which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4953are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4954are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4955command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4956@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4957@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4958@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4959
4960Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4961and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4962need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4963scripts.
4964
4965@end table
4966
4967@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4968@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4969@cindex discarding sections
4970@cindex sections, discarding
4971@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4972The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4973This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4974may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4975@smallexample
49c13adb 4976.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4977@end smallexample
4978@noindent
4979will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4980@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4981sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4982space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4983too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4984space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4985@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4986@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4987This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4988
a0976ea4 4989The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4990on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4991symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4992the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4993section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4994
4995@cindex /DISCARD/
4996The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4997input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4998section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4999
5000@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5001@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5002@cindex output section attributes
5003We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5004like this:
0c71d759 5005
252b5132 5006@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5007@group
7e7d5768 5008@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5009 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5010 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5011 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5012 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5013 @{
5014 @var{output-section-command}
5015 @var{output-section-command}
5016 @dots{}
562d3460 5017 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5018@end group
5019@end smallexample
0c71d759 5020
252b5132
RH
5021We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5022@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5023remaining section attributes.
5024
a1ab1d2a 5025@menu
252b5132
RH
5026* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5027* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5028* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5029* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5030* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5031* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5032* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5033* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5034@end menu
5035
5036@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5037@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5038Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5039parentheses. The following types are defined:
5040
5041@table @code
5042@item NOLOAD
5043The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5044loaded into memory when the program is run.
5045@item DSECT
5046@itemx COPY
5047@itemx INFO
5048@itemx OVERLAY
5049These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5050rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5051marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5052section when the program is run.
5053@end table
5054
5055@kindex NOLOAD
5056@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5057@cindex loading, preventing
5058The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5059the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5060the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5061@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5062need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5063@smallexample
5064@group
5065SECTIONS @{
5066 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5067 @dots{}
5068@}
5069@end group
5070@end smallexample
5071
5072@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5073@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5074@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5075@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5076@cindex load address
5077@cindex section load address
5078Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5079@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5080@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5081specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5082address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5083
ea5cae92
NC
5084The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5085specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5086takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5087load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5088region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5089
5090If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5091section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5092load address:
5093
5094@itemize @bullet
5095@item
5096If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5097the LMA address as well.
5098
5099@item
5100If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5101
5102@item
5103Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5104with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5105section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5106VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5107the last section in the located region.
5108
5109@item
5110If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5111that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5112
5113@item
5114If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5115section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5116@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5117
5118@cindex ROM initialized data
5119@cindex initialized data in ROM
5120This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5121example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5122called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5123@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5124even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5125uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5126defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5127counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5128
5129@smallexample
5130@group
5131SECTIONS
5132 @{
5133 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5134 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5135 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5136 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5137 .bss 0x3000 :
5138 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5139@}
5140@end group
5141@end smallexample
5142
5143The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5144this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5145the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5146how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5147script.
5148
5149@smallexample
5150@group
5151extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5152char *src = &_etext;
5153char *dst = &_data;
5154
ea5cae92
NC
5155/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5156while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5157 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5158
ea5cae92 5159/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5160for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5161 *dst = 0;
5162@end group
5163@end smallexample
5164
bbf115d3
L
5165@node Forced Output Alignment
5166@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5167@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5168@cindex forcing output section alignment
5169@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5170You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5171alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5172intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5173
7e7d5768
AM
5174@node Forced Input Alignment
5175@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5176@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5177@cindex forcing input section alignment
5178@cindex input section alignment
5179You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5180SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5181sections, whether larger or smaller.
5182
0c71d759
NC
5183@node Output Section Constraint
5184@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5185@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5186@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5187@cindex constraints on output sections
5188You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5189of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5190read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5191@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5192
252b5132 5193@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5194@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5195@kindex >@var{region}
5196@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5197@cindex memory regions and sections
5198You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5199using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5200
5201Here is a simple example:
5202@smallexample
5203@group
5204MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5205SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5206@end group
5207@end smallexample
5208
5209@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5210@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5211@kindex :@var{phdr}
5212@cindex section, assigning to program header
5213@cindex program headers and sections
5214You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5215using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5216one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5217assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5218@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5219linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5220
5221Here is a simple example:
5222@smallexample
5223@group
5224PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5225SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5226@end group
5227@end smallexample
5228
5229@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5230@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5231@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5232@cindex section fill pattern
5233@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5234You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5235@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5236(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5237within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5238alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5239necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5240of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5241an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5242fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5243other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5244pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5245expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5246
5247You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5248output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5249
5250Here is a simple example:
5251@smallexample
5252@group
563e308f 5253SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5254@end group
5255@end smallexample
5256
5257@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5258@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5259@kindex OVERLAY
5260@cindex overlays
5261An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5262are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5263the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5264copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5265required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5266can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5267than another.
5268
5269Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5270@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5271output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5272command is as follows:
5273@smallexample
5274@group
5275OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5276 @{
5277 @var{secname1}
5278 @{
5279 @var{output-section-command}
5280 @var{output-section-command}
5281 @dots{}
5282 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5283 @var{secname2}
5284 @{
5285 @var{output-section-command}
5286 @var{output-section-command}
5287 @dots{}
5288 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5289 @dots{}
abc9061b 5290 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5291@end group
5292@end smallexample
5293
5294Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5295section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5296section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5297those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5298except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5299sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5300
abc9061b
CC
5301The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5302the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5303
252b5132
RH
5304The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5305addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5306memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5307whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5308and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5309and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5310
56dd11f0
NC
5311If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5312references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5313the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5314sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5315@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5316
5317For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5318provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5319defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5320@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5321the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5322within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5323symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5324
5325At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5326the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5327
5328Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5329@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5330@smallexample
5331@group
5332 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5333 @{
5334 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5335 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5336 @}
5337@end group
5338@end smallexample
5339@noindent
5340This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5341address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5342@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5343following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5344@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5345@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5346
5347C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5348like the following.
5349
5350@smallexample
5351@group
5352 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5353 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5354 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5355@end group
5356@end smallexample
5357
5358Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5359everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5360example could have been written identically as follows.
5361
5362@smallexample
5363@group
5364 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5365 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5366 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5367 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5368 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5369 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5370 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5371@end group
5372@end smallexample
5373
5374@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5375@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5376@kindex MEMORY
5377@cindex memory regions
5378@cindex regions of memory
5379@cindex allocating memory
5380@cindex discontinuous memory
5381The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5382memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5383
5384The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5385memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5386may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5387can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5388set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5389regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5390around to fit into the available regions.
5391
127fcdff
AB
5392A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5393however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5394specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5395@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5396@smallexample
5397@group
a1ab1d2a 5398MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5399 @{
5400 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5401 @dots{}
5402 @}
5403@end group
5404@end smallexample
5405
5406The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5407region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5408Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5409with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5410must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5411add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5412command.
252b5132
RH
5413
5414@cindex memory region attributes
5415The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5416whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5417not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5418@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5419section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5420the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5421them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5422
5423The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5424@table @samp
5425@item R
5426Read-only section
5427@item W
5428Read/write section
5429@item X
5430Executable section
5431@item A
5432Allocatable section
5433@item I
5434Initialized section
5435@item L
5436Same as @samp{I}
5437@item !
c09e9a8c 5438Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5439@end table
5440
81c688d5 5441If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5442@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5443attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5444unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5445not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5446string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5447or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5448the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5449
5450@kindex ORIGIN =
5451@kindex o =
5452@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5453The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5454the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5455cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5456abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5457@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5458
5459@kindex LENGTH =
5460@kindex len =
5461@kindex l =
5462The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5463region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5464be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5465@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5466
5467In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5468available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5469and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5470linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5471is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5472or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5473explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5474region.
5475
5476@smallexample
5477@group
a1ab1d2a 5478MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5479 @{
5480 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5481 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5482 @}
5483@end group
5484@end smallexample
5485
5486Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5487specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5488@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5489a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5490output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5491was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5492the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5493output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5494region, the linker will issue an error message.
5495
3ec57632 5496It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5497expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5498@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5499
5500@smallexample
5501@group
c0065db7 5502 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5503@end group
5504@end smallexample
5505
252b5132
RH
5506@node PHDRS
5507@section PHDRS Command
5508@kindex PHDRS
5509@cindex program headers
5510@cindex ELF program headers
5511@cindex program segments
5512@cindex segments, ELF
5513The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5514@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5515loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5516program with the @samp{-p} option.
5517
5518When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5519reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5520program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5521This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5522interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5523
5524The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5525in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5526precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5527the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5528not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5529
5530The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5531generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5532ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5533
5534This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5535@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5536
5537@smallexample
5538@group
5539PHDRS
5540@{
5541 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5542 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5543@}
5544@end group
5545@end smallexample
5546
5547The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5548of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5549header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5550with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5551must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5552is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5553
5554Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5555system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5556specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5557sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5558attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5559Section Phdr}.
5560
5561It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5562merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5563repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5564contain the section.
5565
5566If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5567then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5568not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5569convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5570placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5571default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5572segment at all.
5573
5574@kindex FILEHDR
5575@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5576You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5577the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5578The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5579file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5580include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5581segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5582these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5583
5584The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5585value of the keyword.
5586
5587@table @asis
5588@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5589Indicates an unused program header.
5590
5591@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5592Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5593the file.
5594
5595@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5596Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5597
5598@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5599Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5600found.
5601
5602@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5603Indicates a segment holding note information.
5604
5605@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5606A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5607ABI.
5608
5609@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5610Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5611
1a9ccd70
NC
5612@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5613Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5614
252b5132
RH
5615@item @var{expression}
5616An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5617be used for types not defined above.
5618@end table
5619
5620You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5621in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5622@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5623Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5624output section attribute.
5625
5626The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5627which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5628explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5629an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5630header.
5631
5632Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5633headers used on a native ELF system.
5634
5635@example
5636@group
5637PHDRS
5638@{
5639 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5640 interp PT_INTERP ;
5641 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5642 data PT_LOAD ;
5643 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5644@}
5645
5646SECTIONS
5647@{
5648 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5649 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5650 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5651 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5652 @dots{}
5653 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5654 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5655 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5656 @dots{}
5657@}
5658@end group
5659@end example
5660
5661@node VERSION
5662@section VERSION Command
5663@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5664@cindex symbol versions
5665@cindex version script
5666@cindex versions of symbols
5667The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5668only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5669symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5670a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5671shared library.
5672
5673You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5674you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5675also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5676
5677The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5678@smallexample
5679VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5680@end smallexample
5681
5682The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5683Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5684version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5685version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5686version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5687scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5688library.
5689
5690The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5691examples.
5692
5693@smallexample
5694VERS_1.1 @{
5695 global:
5696 foo1;
5697 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5698 old*;
5699 original*;
5700 new*;
252b5132
RH
5701@};
5702
5703VERS_1.2 @{
5704 foo2;
5705@} VERS_1.1;
5706
5707VERS_2.0 @{
5708 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5709 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5710 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5711 "f(int, double)";
5712 @};
252b5132
RH
5713@} VERS_1.2;
5714@end smallexample
5715
5716This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5717version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5718The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5719a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5720of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5721symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5722is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5723in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5724However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5725name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5726
5727Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5728depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5729to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5730
5731Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5732depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5733and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5734
5735When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5736specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5737unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5738unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5739somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5740wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5741wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5742set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5743ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5744
5745The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5746they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5747could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5748However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5749
0f6bf451 5750Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5751in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5752symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5753won't.
5754
5755@smallexample
7c9c73be 5756@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5757@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5758
252b5132
RH
5759When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5760symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5761requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5762shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5763loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5764linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5765application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5766way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5767all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5768search for each symbol reference.
5769
5770The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5771doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5772that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5773functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5774the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5775required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5776that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5777versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5778the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5779
5780There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5781first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5782source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5783script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5784maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5785@smallexample
5786__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5787@end smallexample
5788@noindent
5789in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5790be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5791The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5792@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5793takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5794
5795The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5796function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5797an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5798version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5799linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5800
5801To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5802source file. Here is an example:
5803
5804@smallexample
5805__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5806__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5807__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5808__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5809@end smallexample
5810
5811In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5812unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5813example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5814@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5815
5816When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5817some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5818this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5819@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5820declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5821you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5822
5823If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5824within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5825(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5826specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5827
cb840a31
L
5828You can also specify the language in the version script:
5829
5830@smallexample
5831VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5832@end smallexample
5833
c0065db7 5834The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5835The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5836demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5837patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5838@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5839
86043bbb
MM
5840Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5841described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5842or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5843the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5844whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5845cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5846might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5847should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5848expect when you upgrade.
5849
252b5132
RH
5850@node Expressions
5851@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5852@cindex expressions
5853@cindex arithmetic
5854The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5855that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5856expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5857host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5858
5859You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5860
5861The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5862expressions.
5863
5864@menu
5865* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5866* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5867* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5868* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5869* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5870* Operators:: Operators
5871* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5872* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5873* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5874@end menu
5875
5876@node Constants
5877@subsection Constants
5878@cindex integer notation
5879@cindex constants in linker scripts
5880All constants are integers.
5881
5882As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5883octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5884hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5885@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5886@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5887value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5888
5889@cindex scaled integers
5890@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5891@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5892@cindex suffixes for integers
5893@cindex integer suffixes
5894In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5895constant by
5896@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5897@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5898@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5899@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5900@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5901@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5902@tex
5903${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5904@end tex
5905@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5906respectively. For example, the following
5907all refer to the same quantity:
5908
252b5132 5909@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5910_fourk_1 = 4K;
5911_fourk_2 = 4096;
5912_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5913_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5914@end smallexample
5915
8a308ae8
NC
5916Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5917conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5918
0c71d759
NC
5919@node Symbolic Constants
5920@subsection Symbolic Constants
5921@cindex symbolic constants
5922@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5923It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5924the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5925
5926@table @code
5927@item MAXPAGESIZE
5928@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5929The target's maximum page size.
5930
5931@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5932@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5933The target's default page size.
5934@end table
5935
5936So for example:
5937
5938@smallexample
9d5777a3 5939 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5940@end smallexample
5941
5942will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5943supported by the target.
5944
252b5132
RH
5945@node Symbols
5946@subsection Symbol Names
5947@cindex symbol names
5948@cindex names
5949@cindex quoted symbol names
5950@kindex "
5951Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5952and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5953Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5954specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5955keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5956@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5957"SECTION" = 9;
5958"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5959@end smallexample
5960
5961Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5962to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5963whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5964
ecca9871
L
5965@node Orphan Sections
5966@subsection Orphan Sections
5967@cindex orphan
5968Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5969are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5970script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5971output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5972in which to place the orphaned input section.
5973
5974If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5975an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5976placed at the end of that output section.
5977
5978If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5979sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5980name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5981orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5982one new output section.
5983
5984If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5985then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5986in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5987linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5988attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5989sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5990support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5991
a05a5b64
TP
5992The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5993(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5994output sections an orphan is placed in.
5995
252b5132
RH
5996@node Location Counter
5997@subsection The Location Counter
5998@kindex .
5999@cindex dot
6000@cindex location counter
6001@cindex current output location
6002The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6003current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6004location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6005within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6006anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6007
6008@cindex holes
6009Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6010moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6011location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6012and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6013doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6014
6015@smallexample
6016SECTIONS
6017@{
6018 output :
6019 @{
6020 file1(.text)
6021 . = . + 1000;
6022 file2(.text)
6023 . += 1000;
6024 file3(.text)
563e308f 6025 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6026@}
6027@end smallexample
6028@noindent
6029In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6030located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6031followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6032@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6033@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6034specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6035
5c6bbab8
NC
6036@cindex dot inside sections
6037Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6038current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6039statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6040absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6041however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6042not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6043
6044@smallexample
6045SECTIONS
6046@{
6047 . = 0x100
6048 .text: @{
6049 *(.text)
6050 . = 0x200
6051 @}
6052 . = 0x500
6053 .data: @{
6054 *(.data)
6055 . += 0x600
6056 @}
6057@}
6058@end smallexample
6059
6060The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6061and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6062the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6063much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6064move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6065and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6066the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6067the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6068
b5666f2f
AM
6069@cindex dot outside sections
6070Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6071output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6072needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6073
6074@smallexample
6075SECTIONS
6076@{
6077 start_of_text = . ;
6078 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6079 end_of_text = . ;
6080
6081 start_of_data = . ;
6082 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6083 end_of_data = . ;
6084@}
6085@end smallexample
6086
6087If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6088not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6089between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6090should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6091blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6092the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6093sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6094statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6095special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6096place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6097as follows:
6098
6099@smallexample
6100SECTIONS
6101@{
6102 start_of_text = . ;
6103 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6104 end_of_text = . ;
6105
6106 start_of_data = . ;
6107 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6108 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6109 end_of_data = . ;
6110@}
6111@end smallexample
6112
6113This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6114@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6115placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6116assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6117a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6118section. So you could write:
6119
6120@smallexample
6121SECTIONS
6122@{
6123 start_of_text = . ;
6124 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6125 end_of_text = . ;
6126
6127 . = . ;
6128 start_of_data = . ;
6129 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6130 end_of_data = . ;
6131@}
6132@end smallexample
6133
6134Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6135@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6136
252b5132
RH
6137@need 2000
6138@node Operators
6139@subsection Operators
6140@cindex operators for arithmetic
6141@cindex arithmetic operators
6142@cindex precedence in expressions
6143The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6144the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6145@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6146@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6147@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6148@smallexample
6149precedence associativity Operators Notes
6150(highest)
61511 left ! - ~ (1)
61522 left * / %
61533 left + -
61544 left >> <<
61555 left == != > < <= >=
61566 left &
61577 left |
61588 left &&
61599 left ||
616010 right ? :
616111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6162(lowest)
6163@end smallexample
6164Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6165(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6166(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6167@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6168@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6169@tex
6170\vskip \baselineskip
6171%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6172\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6173\hrule
6174\halign
6175{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6176height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6177&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6178height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6179\noalign{\hrule}
6180height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6181&highest&&&&&\cr
6182% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6183&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6184&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6185&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6186&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6187&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6188&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6189&7&&left&&|&\cr
6190&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6191&9&&left&&||&\cr
6192&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6193&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6194&lowest&&&&&\cr
6195height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6196\hrule}
6197@end tex
6198@iftex
6199{
6200@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6201@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6202@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6203}
6204@end iftex
6205@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6206
6207@node Evaluation
6208@subsection Evaluation
6209@cindex lazy evaluation
6210@cindex expression evaluation order
6211The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6212an expression when absolutely necessary.
6213
6214The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6215address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6216regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6217as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6218
6219However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6220until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6221other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6222for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6223
6224The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6225assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6226allocation.
6227
6228Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6229@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6230
6231If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6232available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6233following
6234@smallexample
6235@group
6236SECTIONS
6237 @{
a1ab1d2a 6238 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6239 @{ *(.text) @}
6240 @}
6241@end group
6242@end smallexample
6243@noindent
6244will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6245address}.
6246
6247@node Expression Section
6248@subsection The Section of an Expression
6249@cindex expression sections
6250@cindex absolute expressions
6251@cindex relative expressions
6252@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6253@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6254@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6255Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6256relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6257using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6258value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6259symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6260operations.
6261
abf4be64
AM
6262Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6263section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6264address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6265@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6266functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6267One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6268(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6269differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6270versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6271section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6272Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6273absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6274given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6275everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6276
6277In the following simple example,
252b5132 6278
7542af2a
AM
6279@smallexample
6280@group
6281SECTIONS
6282 @{
6283 . = 0x100;
6284 __executable_start = 0x100;
6285 .data :
6286 @{
6287 . = 0x10;
6288 __data_start = 0x10;
6289 *(.data)
6290 @}
6291 @dots{}
6292 @}
6293@end group
6294@end smallexample
252b5132 6295
7542af2a
AM
6296both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6297address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6298@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6299section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6300
5c3049d2
AM
6301For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6302addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6303
6304@itemize @bullet
6305@item
c05f749e
AM
6306Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6307operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6308absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6309@item
7542af2a
AM
6310Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6311relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6312and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6313@item
c05f749e
AM
6314Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6315in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6316address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6317before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6318@end itemize
6319
6320The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6321
6322@itemize @bullet
6323@item
6324An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6325@item
6326The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6327@item
9bc8bb33 6328The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6329relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6330(after above conversions) is also a number when
6331@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6332but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6333@item
6334The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6335relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6336section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6337@item
6338The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6339conversions) is an absolute address.
6340@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6341
6342You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6343to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6344create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6345section @samp{.data}:
6346@smallexample
6347SECTIONS
6348 @{
6349 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6350 @}
6351@end smallexample
6352@noindent
6353If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6354@samp{.data} section.
6355
7542af2a
AM
6356Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6357particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6358
252b5132
RH
6359@node Builtin Functions
6360@subsection Builtin Functions
6361@cindex functions in expressions
6362The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6363use in linker script expressions.
6364
6365@table @code
6366@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6367@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6368@cindex expression, absolute
6369Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6370of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6371value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6372normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6373
6374@item ADDR(@var{section})
6375@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6376@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6377Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6378script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6379the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6380@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6381@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6382the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6383@smallexample
6384@group
6385SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6386 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6387 @{
252b5132
RH
6388 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6389 @dots{}
6390 @}
6391 .output :
6392 @{
6393 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6394 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6395 @}
6396@dots{} @}
6397@end group
6398@end smallexample
6399
876f4090
NS
6400@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6401@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6402@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6403@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6404@cindex round up location counter
6405@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6406@cindex round up expression
6407@cindex align expression
6408Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6409to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6410doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6411arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6412expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6413equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6414
6415Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6416next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6417variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6418input sections:
252b5132
RH
6419@smallexample
6420@group
6421SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6422 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6423 *(.data)
6424 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6425 @}
6426@dots{} @}
6427@end group
6428@end smallexample
6429@noindent
6430The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6431a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6432a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6433of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6434
6435The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6436
362c1d1a
NS
6437@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6438@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6439@cindex section alignment
6440Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6441been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6442evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6443the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6444value in that section.
6445@smallexample
6446@group
6447SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6448 .output @{
6449 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6450 @dots{}
6451 @}
6452@dots{} @}
6453@end group
6454@end smallexample
6455
252b5132
RH
6456@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6457@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6458This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6459scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6460section.
6461
2d20f7bf
JJ
6462@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6463@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6464This is equivalent to either
6465@smallexample
6466(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6467@end smallexample
6468or
6469@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6470(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6471 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6472@end smallexample
6473@noindent
6474depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6475for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6476@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6477If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6478memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6479bytes in the on-disk file.
6480
6481This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6482any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6483@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6484be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6485running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6486that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6487page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6488
6489@noindent
6490Example:
6491@smallexample
6492 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6493@end smallexample
6494
6495@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6496@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6497This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6498evaluation purposes.
6499
6500@smallexample
6501 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6502@end smallexample
6503
a4f5ad88
JJ
6504@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6505@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6506This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6507@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6508When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6509does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6510@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6511argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6512script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6513@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6514padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6515section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6516
6517@smallexample
6518 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6519@end smallexample
6520
252b5132
RH
6521@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6522@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6523@cindex symbol defaults
6524Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6525defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6526return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6527default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6528shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6529the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6530existed, its value is preserved:
6531
6532@smallexample
6533@group
6534SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6535 .text : @{
6536 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6537 @dots{}
6538 @}
6539 @dots{}
6540@}
6541@end group
6542@end smallexample
6543
3ec57632
NC
6544@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6545@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6546Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6547
252b5132
RH
6548@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6549@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6550@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6551Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6552Section LMA}).
6553
2e53f7d6
NC
6554@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6555@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6556Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6557@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6558
252b5132
RH
6559@kindex MAX
6560@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6561Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6562
6563@kindex MIN
6564@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6565Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6566
6567@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6568@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6569@cindex unallocated address, next
6570Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6571This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6572use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6573output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6574
3ec57632
NC
6575@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6576@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6577Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6578
ba916c8a
MM
6579@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6580@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6581Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6582value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6583@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6584will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6585can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6586``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6587name.
6588
252b5132
RH
6589@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6590@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6591@cindex section size
6592Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6593been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6594evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6595@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6596@smallexample
6597@group
6598SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6599 .output @{
6600 .start = . ;
6601 @dots{}
6602 .end = . ;
6603 @}
6604 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6605 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6606@dots{} @}
6607@end group
6608@end smallexample
6609
6610@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6611@itemx sizeof_headers
6612@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6613@cindex header size
6614Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6615information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6616this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6617choose, to facilitate paging.
6618
6619@cindex not enough room for program headers
6620@cindex program headers, not enough room
6621When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6622@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6623number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6624addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6625additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6626room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6627the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6628script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6629you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6630command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6631@end table
6632
6633@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6634@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6635@cindex implicit linker scripts
6636If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6637an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6638linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6639linker will report an error.
6640
6641An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6642
6643Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6644assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6645commands.
6646
6647Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6648at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6649read. This can affect archive searching.
6650
6651@ifset GENERIC
6652@node Machine Dependent
6653@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6654
6655@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6656@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6657sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6658functionality are not listed.
6659
6660@menu
36f63dca
NC
6661@ifset H8300
6662* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6663@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6664@ifset M68HC11
6665* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6666@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6667@ifset ARM
6668* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6669@end ifset
6670@ifset HPPA
6671* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6672@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6673@ifset M68K
6674* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6675@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6676@ifset MIPS
6677* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6678@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6679@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6680* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6681@end ifset
2469cfa2 6682@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6683* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6684@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6685@ifset NDS32
6686* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6687@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6688@ifset NIOSII
6689* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6690@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6691@ifset POWERPC
6692* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6693@end ifset
6694@ifset POWERPC64
6695* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6696@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6697@ifset S/390
6698* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6699@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6700@ifset SPU
6701* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6702@end ifset
74459f0e 6703@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6704* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6705@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6706@ifset WIN32
6707* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6708@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6709@ifset XTENSA
6710* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6711@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6712@end menu
6713@end ifset
6714
252b5132
RH
6715@ifset H8300
6716@ifclear GENERIC
6717@raisesections
6718@end ifclear
6719
6720@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6721@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6722
6723@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6724For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6725you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6726
6727@table @emph
6728@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6729@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6730@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6731targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6732program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6733respectively.
6734
6735@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6736@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6737@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6738@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6739sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6740page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6741(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6742@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6743top page of memory).
1502569c 6744
81f5558e
NC
6745@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6746indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6747displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6748the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6749@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6750whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6751range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6752
1502569c 6753@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6754@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6755biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6756which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6757page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6758(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6759@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6760the top page of memory).
6761
6762@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6763@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
676432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6765changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6766(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6767@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6768the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6769@end table
6770
6771@ifclear GENERIC
6772@lowersections
6773@end ifclear
6774@end ifset
6775
36f63dca 6776@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6777@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6778@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6779@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6780@node Renesas
6781@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6782
c2dcd04e
NC
6783@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6784H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6785options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6786@end ifset
6787@end ifclear
6788
36f63dca
NC
6789@ifset ARM
6790@ifclear GENERIC
6791@raisesections
6792@end ifclear
6793
93fd0973
SC
6794@ifset M68HC11
6795@ifclear GENERIC
6796@raisesections
6797@end ifclear
6798
6799@node M68HC11/68HC12
6800@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6801
6802@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6803
6804@subsection Linker Relaxation
6805
6806For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6807optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6808
6809@table @emph
6810@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6811@item relaxing address modes
6812@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6813targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6814program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6815respectively.
6816
6817@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6818transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6819page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6820
6821@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6822When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6823of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6824addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6825@code{bset} instructions.
6826
6827@end table
6828
6829@subsection Trampoline Generation
6830
6831@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6832@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6833For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6834call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6835will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6836trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6837case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6838point to the function trampoline.
6839
6840@ifclear GENERIC
6841@lowersections
6842@end ifclear
6843@end ifset
6844
36f63dca 6845@node ARM
3674e28a 6846@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6847
6848@cindex ARM interworking support
6849@kindex --support-old-code
6850For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6851between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6852been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6853line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6854libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6855option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6856given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6857which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6858the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6859non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6860
6861@cindex thumb entry point
6862@cindex entry point, thumb
6863@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6864The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6865@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6866But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6867branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6868executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6869
ce11ba6c
KT
6870@cindex PE import table prefixing
6871@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6872The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6873the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6874element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6875import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6876
e489d0ae
PB
6877@cindex BE8
6878@kindex --be8
6879The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6880executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6881objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6882option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6883little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6884
3674e28a
PB
6885@cindex TARGET1
6886@kindex --target1-rel
6887@kindex --target1-abs
6888The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6889@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6890or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6891and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6892
6893@cindex TARGET2
6894@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6895The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6896@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6897meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6898@table @samp
6899@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6900@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6901@item abs
6902@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6903@item got-rel
6904@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6905@end table
6906
319850b4
JB
6907@cindex FIX_V4BX
6908@kindex --fix-v4bx
6909The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6910specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6911interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6912also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6913
6914In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6915linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6916@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6917
6918In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6919relocations are ignored.
6920
845b51d6
PB
6921@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6922@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6923Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6924relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6925
6926@smallexample
6927TST rM, #1
6928MOVEQ PC, rM
6929BX Rn
6930@end smallexample
6931
6932This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6933and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6934condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6935
33bfe774
JB
6936@cindex USE_BLX
6937@kindex --use-blx
6938The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6939BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6940situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6941code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6942each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6943
6944This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6945specify it if you are using that target.
6946
c6dd86c6
JB
6947@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6948@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6949The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6950bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6951instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6952to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6953the support code can read the intended values.
6954
6955The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6956intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6957and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6958intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6959full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6960you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6961
6962If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6963enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6964@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6965mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6966vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6967@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6968
6969If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6970potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6971such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6972first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6973instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6974the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6975are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6976
2de70689
MGD
6977@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6978@kindex --fix-arm1176
6979@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6980The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6981in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6982are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6983unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6984
9d5777a3 6985Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6986Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6987http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6988
a504d23a
LA
6989@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6990@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6991
6992The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6993workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6994the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6995off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6996the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6997core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6998integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6999VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7000
7001The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7002necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7003
7004The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7005@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7006STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7007linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7008@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7009
7010If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7011potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7012such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7013replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7014branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7015then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7016
7017The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7018the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7019
7020The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7021they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7022there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7023occurs.
7024
7025The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7026PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7027large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7028cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7029occurs.
7030
bf21ed78
MS
7031@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7032@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7033The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7034warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7035enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7036linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7037using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7038not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7039
7040@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7041@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7042The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7043warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7044@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7045linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7046using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7047
726150b7
NC
7048@cindex PIC_VENEER
7049@kindex --pic-veneer
7050The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7051ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7052is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7053@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7054
7055@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7056@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7057The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7058code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7059perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7060placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7061controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7062The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7063duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7064group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7065code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7066where they should be placed.
7067
7068The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7069@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7070placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7071branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7072placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7073value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7074exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7075A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7076linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7077from the input sections.
7078
7079The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7080@samp{N = +1}.
7081
1a51c1a4
NC
7082Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7083only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7084otherwise.
7085
1db37fe6
YG
7086@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7087@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7088@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7089The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7090
7091The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7092
68fcca92
JW
7093@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7094@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7095@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7096The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7097
7098Please contact ARM for further details.
7099
1db37fe6
YG
7100@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7101@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7102@cindex Merging exidx entries
7103The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7104
7105@kindex --long-plt
7106@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7107The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7108which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7109entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7110
1f56df9d
JW
7111@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7112@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7113The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7114link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7115
4ba2ef8f
TP
7116@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7117All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7118Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7119@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7120veneers in memory.
7121
54ddd295
TP
7122@kindex --cmse-implib
7123@cindex Secure gateway import library
7124The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7125specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7126secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7127executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7128
0955507f
TP
7129@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7130@cindex Input import library
7131The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7132must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7133given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7134in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7135@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7136library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7137library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7138for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7139specified.
7140
36f63dca
NC
7141@ifclear GENERIC
7142@lowersections
7143@end ifclear
7144@end ifset
7145
7146@ifset HPPA
7147@ifclear GENERIC
7148@raisesections
7149@end ifclear
7150
7151@node HPPA ELF32
7152@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7153@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7154@kindex --multi-subspace
7155When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7156import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7157The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7158stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7159multiple sub-spaces.
7160
7161@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7162@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7163Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7164stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7165@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7166sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7167a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7168the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7169conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7170prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7171A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7172branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7173@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7174@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7175detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7176positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7177
7178Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7179single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7180create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7181large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7182
7183@ifclear GENERIC
7184@lowersections
7185@end ifclear
7186@end ifset
7187
7fb9f789
NC
7188@ifset M68K
7189@ifclear GENERIC
7190@raisesections
7191@end ifclear
7192
7193@node M68K
7194@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7195
7196@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7197@kindex --got=@var{type}
7198The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7199The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7200@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7201the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7202@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7203entries only at non-negative offsets.
7204@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7205entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7206support such GOTs.
7207@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7208output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7209file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7210files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7211
7212@ifclear GENERIC
7213@lowersections
7214@end ifclear
7215@end ifset
7216
833794fc
MR
7217@ifset MIPS
7218@ifclear GENERIC
7219@raisesections
7220@end ifclear
7221
7222@node MIPS
7223@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7224
7225@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7226@kindex --insn32
7227@kindex --no-insn32
7228The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7229microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7230in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7231used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7232or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7233including 16-bit ones where possible.
7234
8b10b0b3
MR
7235@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7236@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7237@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7238The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7239control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7240@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7241relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7242calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7243relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7244instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7245or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7246the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7247
833794fc
MR
7248@ifclear GENERIC
7249@lowersections
7250@end ifclear
7251@end ifset
7252
36f63dca
NC
7253@ifset MMIX
7254@ifclear GENERIC
7255@raisesections
7256@end ifclear
7257
7258@node MMIX
7259@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7260For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7261@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7262understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7263can translate between the two formats.
7264
7265There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7266Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7267registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7268equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7269@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7270global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7271this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7272symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7273
7a2de473
HPN
7274Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7275@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7276The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7277of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7278
7279Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7280are left out from an mmo file.
7281
7282@ifclear GENERIC
7283@lowersections
7284@end ifclear
7285@end ifset
7286
7287@ifset MSP430
7288@ifclear GENERIC
7289@raisesections
7290@end ifclear
7291
7292@node MSP430
7293@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7294For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7295will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7296just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7297
7298@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7299The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7300
7301@table @code
7302@item @samp{.vectors}
7303Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7304
7305@item @samp{.bootloader}
7306Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7307in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7308
7309@item @samp{.infomem}
7310Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7311this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7312
c0065db7 7313@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7314This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7315in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7316
7317@item @samp{.noinit}
7318Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7319
c0065db7 7320The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7321@end table
7322
7ef3addb
JL
7323@table @option
7324@cindex MSP430 Options
7325@kindex --code-region
7326@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7327This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7328argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7329using this option.
7330
7331@kindex --data-region
7332@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7333This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7334[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7335for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7336
7337@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7338@item --disable-sec-transformation
7339Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7340and @code{--data-region} options.
7341This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7342wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7343not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7344@end table
7345
36f63dca
NC
7346@ifclear GENERIC
7347@lowersections
7348@end ifclear
7349@end ifset
7350
35c08157
KLC
7351@ifset NDS32
7352@ifclear GENERIC
7353@raisesections
7354@end ifclear
7355
7356@node NDS32
7357@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7358@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7359For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7360relaxes objects according to these options.
7361
7362@table @code
7363@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7364Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7365
7366@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7367Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7368
7369@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7370Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7371
7372@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7373Export the EX9 table after linking.
7374
7375@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7376Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7377
7378@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7379Update the existing EX9 table.
7380
7381@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7382Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7383
7384@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7385Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7386
7387@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7388Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7389
7390@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7391Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7392@end table
7393
7394@ifclear GENERIC
7395@lowersections
7396@end ifclear
7397@end ifset
7398
78058a5e
SL
7399@ifset NIOSII
7400@ifclear GENERIC
7401@raisesections
7402@end ifclear
7403
7404@node Nios II
7405@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7406@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7407@kindex --relax on Nios II
7408
7409Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7410transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7411which may result in @command{ld} giving
7412@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7413The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7414trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7415outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7416trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7417be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7418larger than 256MB.
7419
7420The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7421is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7422@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7423locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7424source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7425register as a temporary.
7426
7427Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7428relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7429option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7430
7431@ifclear GENERIC
7432@lowersections
7433@end ifclear
7434@end ifset
7435
2a60a7a8
AM
7436@ifset POWERPC
7437@ifclear GENERIC
7438@raisesections
7439@end ifclear
7440
7441@node PowerPC ELF32
7442@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7443@cindex PowerPC long branches
7444@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7445Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7446displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7447@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7448@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7449the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7450section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7451section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7452@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7453both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7454considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7455
7456@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7457@table @option
7458@cindex PowerPC PLT
7459@kindex --bss-plt
7460@item --bss-plt
7461Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7462generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7463the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7464writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7465@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7466PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7467compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7468BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7469
016687f8
AM
7470@kindex --secure-plt
7471@item --secure-plt
7472@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7473@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7474when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7475layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7476style BSS PLT.
7477
2a60a7a8
AM
7478@cindex PowerPC GOT
7479@kindex --sdata-got
7480@item --sdata-got
7481The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7482sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7483@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7484section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7485@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7486@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7487@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7488@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7489PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7490pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7491GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7492really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7493
7494@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7495@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7496@item --emit-stub-syms
7497This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7498symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7499
7500@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7501@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7502@item --no-tls-optimize
7503PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7504sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7505disable the optimization.
7506@end table
7507
7508@ifclear GENERIC
7509@lowersections
7510@end ifclear
7511@end ifset
7512
7513@ifset POWERPC64
7514@ifclear GENERIC
7515@raisesections
7516@end ifclear
7517
7518@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7519@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7520
7521@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7522@table @option
7523@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7524@kindex --stub-group-size
7525@item --stub-group-size
7526Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7527by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7528@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7529sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7530a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7531the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7532conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7533prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7534A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7535branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7536@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7537@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7538detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7539positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7540
7541Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7542single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7543create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7544large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7545
7546@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7547@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7548@item --emit-stub-syms
7549This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7550symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7551
7552@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7553@kindex --dotsyms
7554@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7555@item --dotsyms
7556@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7557These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7558in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7559function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7560code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7561properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7562to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7563@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7564dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7565feature.
7566
7ae4ea7d
AM
7567@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7568@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7569@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7570@item --save-restore-funcs
7571@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7572These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7573provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7574@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7575function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7576link.
7577
2a60a7a8
AM
7578@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7579@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7580@item --no-tls-optimize
7581PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7582sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7583disable the optimization.
7584
7c9cf415
AM
7585@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7586@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7587@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7588@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7589@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7590These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7591stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7592an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7593@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7594stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7595option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7596Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7597slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7598application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7599normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7600
2a60a7a8
AM
7601@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7602@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7603@item --no-opd-optimize
7604PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7605corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7606the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7607Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7608
7609@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7610@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7611@item --non-overlapping-opd
7612Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7613@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7614the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7615entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7616
7617@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7618@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7619@item --no-toc-optimize
7620PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7621entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7622reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7623marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7624marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7625relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7626unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7627reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7628discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7629reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7630code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7631optimization.
7632
7633@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7634@kindex --no-multi-toc
7635@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7636If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7637@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7638where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7639entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7640total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7641grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7642TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7643calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7644help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
764564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7646Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7647
7648@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7649@kindex --no-toc-sort
7650@item --no-toc-sort
7651By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7652happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7653placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7654with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7655referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7656@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7657results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7658off this feature.
7659
7660@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7661@kindex --plt-align
7662@kindex --no-plt-align
7663@item --plt-align
7664@itemx --no-plt-align
7665Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7666aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7667boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7668specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7669specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7670if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7671PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7672
7673@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7674@kindex --plt-static-chain
7675@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7676@item --plt-static-chain
7677@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7678Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7679chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7680chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7681
7682@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7683@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7684@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7685@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7686@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7687With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7688lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7689another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7690order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7691memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7692barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7693looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7694seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7695default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7696
7697@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7698@kindex --plt-localentry
7699@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7700@item --plt-localentry
7701@itemx --no-localentry
7702ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7703ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7704(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7705Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7706or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7707functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7708in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7709interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7710including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7711to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7712complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7713care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7714@end table
7715
7716@ifclear GENERIC
7717@lowersections
7718@end ifclear
7719@end ifset
7720
b4cbbe8f
AK
7721@ifset S/390
7722@ifclear GENERIC
7723@raisesections
7724@end ifclear
7725
7726@node S/390 ELF
7727@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7728
7729@cindex S/390 ELF options
7730@table @option
7731
7732@cindex S/390
7733@kindex --s390-pgste
7734@item --s390-pgste
7735This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7736segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7737binaries marked that way.
7738@end table
7739
7740@ifclear GENERIC
7741@lowersections
7742@end ifclear
7743@end ifset
7744
49fa1e15
AM
7745@ifset SPU
7746@ifclear GENERIC
7747@raisesections
7748@end ifclear
7749
7750@node SPU ELF
7751@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7752
7753@cindex SPU ELF options
7754@table @option
7755
7756@cindex SPU plugins
7757@kindex --plugin
7758@item --plugin
7759This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7760
7761@cindex SPU overlays
7762@kindex --no-overlays
7763@item --no-overlays
7764Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7765regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7766@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7767turns off all this special overlay handling.
7768
7769@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7770@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7771@item --emit-stub-syms
7772This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7773symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7774
7775@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7776@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7777@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7778This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7779function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7780on calls to non-overlay regions.
7781
7782@cindex SPU local store size
7783@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7784@item --local-store=lo:hi
7785@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7786the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7787range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7788
c0065db7 7789@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7790@kindex --stack-analysis
7791@item --stack-analysis
7792SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7793unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7794under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7795@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7796@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7797determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7798for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7799for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7800for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7801find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7802and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7803under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7804dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7805is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7806and calls will be given.
7807
c0065db7 7808@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7809@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7810@item --emit-stack-syms
7811This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7812in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7813These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7814functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7815functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7816such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7817The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7818@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7819@end table
7820
7821@ifclear GENERIC
7822@lowersections
7823@end ifclear
7824@end ifset
7825
36f63dca
NC
7826@ifset TICOFF
7827@ifclear GENERIC
7828@raisesections
7829@end ifclear
7830
7831@node TI COFF
7832@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7833@cindex TI COFF versions
7834@kindex --format=@var{version}
7835The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7836TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7837also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7838format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7839header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7840
7841@ifclear GENERIC
7842@lowersections
7843@end ifclear
7844@end ifset
7845
2ca22b03
NC
7846@ifset WIN32
7847@ifclear GENERIC
7848@raisesections
7849@end ifclear
7850
7851@node WIN32
7852@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7853
c0065db7 7854This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7855See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7856command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7857
7858@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7859@cindex import libraries
7860@item import libraries
69da35b5 7861The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7862libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7863regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7864archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7865support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7866@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7867
c0065db7
RM
7868@item exporting DLL symbols
7869@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7870The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7871
7872@table @emph
7873@item using auto-export functionality
7874@cindex using auto-export functionality
7875By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7876which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7877
0a5d968e
NC
7878@itemize
7879@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7880@item --exclude-symbols
7881@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7882@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7883@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7884@end itemize
7885
09e2aba4
DK
7886When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7887(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7888symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7889often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7890private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7891options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7892exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7893final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7894
7895If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7896command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7897if either of the following are true:
7898
7899@itemize
7900@item A DEF file is used.
7901@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7902@end itemize
dc8465bf 7903
c0065db7
RM
7904@item using a DEF file
7905@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7906Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7907an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7908exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7909name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7910command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7911
7912@example
7913gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7914@end example
7915
0a5d968e
NC
7916Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7917@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7918
dc8465bf
NC
7919Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7920
7921@example
4b5bd4e7 7922LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7923
7924EXPORTS
7925foo
7926bar
7927_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7928another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7929var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7930doo = foo == foo2
7931eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7932@end example
dc8465bf 7933
7fcab871 7934This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7935symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7936alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7937by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7938@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7939@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7940export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7941in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7942symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7943
6b31ad16
DS
7944The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7945name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7946the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7947
b45619c0
NC
7948When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7949library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7950@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7951executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7952
7953With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7954specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7955non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7956
7957If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7958or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7959filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7960
4b5bd4e7
DS
7961The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7962
7963@example
7964EXPORTS
7965 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7966 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7967 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7968@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7969
7970Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7971@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7972@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7973@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7974Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7975@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7976string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7977
7978The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7979
7980@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7981will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7982by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7983linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7984library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7985
7986@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7987The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7988the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7989@code{*_imp__foo}).
7990
7991@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7992well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7993read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7994variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7995the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7996extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7997application will behave unexpectedly.
7998
7999@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8000it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8001symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8002API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8003the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8004
4b5bd4e7
DS
8005See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8006other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8007
8008@cindex creating a DEF file
8009While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8010with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8011
8012@item Using decorations
8013@cindex Using decorations
8014Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8015itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8016declared as:
8017
8018@example
8019__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8020__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8021@end example
8022
8023All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8024any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8025this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8026the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8027
8028Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8029decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8030instead:
8031
8032@example
8033__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8034__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8035@end example
8036
c0065db7
RM
8037This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8038when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8039variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8040code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8041of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8042omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8043@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8044information.
c0065db7 8045@end table
dc8465bf 8046
2ca22b03
NC
8047@cindex automatic data imports
8048@item automatic data imports
8049The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8050by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8051compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8052issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8053code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8054c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8055initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8056decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8057platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8058command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8059The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8060suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8061trigger the feature's use.
8062
c0065db7 8063auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8064additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8065
c0065db7 8066"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8067documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8068
c0065db7
RM
8069The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8070occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8071One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8072below.
8073
8074@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8075For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8076object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8077offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8078field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8079in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8080without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8081The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8082references.
8083
c0065db7
RM
8084The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8085be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8086themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8087runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8088compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8089support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8090run without error on an older system.
8091
c0065db7
RM
8092@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8093enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8094
8095@cindex direct linking to a dll
8096@item direct linking to a dll
8097The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8098including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8099libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8100traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8101libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8102function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8103though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8104storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8105tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8106large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8107
c0065db7 8108Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8109@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8110of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8111perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8112select the dll instead of an import library.
8113
2ca22b03 8114
69da35b5
NC
8115For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8116to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8117
8118@example
45e948fe
NC
8119libxxx.dll.a
8120xxx.dll.a
8121libxxx.a
8122xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8123libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8124cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8125libxxx.dll
8126xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8127@end example
8128
69da35b5
NC
8129before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8130
c0065db7
RM
8131(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8132where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8133@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8134file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8135@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8136
c0065db7
RM
8137Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8138@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8139was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8140various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8141could coexist on the same machine.
8142
2ca22b03
NC
8143The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8144applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8145libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8146
8147@example
8148bin/
8149 cygxxx.dll
8150lib/
8151 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8152 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8153@end example
8154
c0065db7
RM
8155Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8156done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8157
81581. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8159@example
8160gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8161@end example
2ca22b03 8162
69da35b5
NC
8163However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8164(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8165@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8166not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8167
2ca22b03
NC
81682. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8169directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8170should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8171making the app/dll.
8172
8173@example
8174ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8175@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8176
8177Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8178
8179@example
8180gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8181@end example
69da35b5
NC
8182
8183This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8184perfectly legal
8185
8186@example
8187bin/
8188 cygxxx-5.dll
8189lib/
c0065db7 8190 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8191@end example
8192
dc8465bf 8193Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8194even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8195@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8196
8197Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8198wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8199
82001. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8201work with auto-imported data.
8202
dc8465bf
NC
82032. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8204import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8205symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8206for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8207possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8208
45e948fe
NC
82093. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8210critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8211in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8212stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8213
69da35b5 8214So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8215true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8216a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8217binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8218massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8219requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8220will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8221
c0065db7 8222@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8223@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8224@item adding additional names
8225Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8226A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8227exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8228when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8229import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8230
c0065db7 8231@example
dc8465bf
NC
8232LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8233
8234EXPORTS
c0065db7 8235foo
dc8465bf 8236_foo = foo
c0065db7 8237@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8238
8239The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8240
8241Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8242source code using the "weak" attribute:
8243
c0065db7
RM
8244@example
8245void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8246void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8247@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8248
8249See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8250symbols.
8251
8252@item renaming symbols
8253Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8254kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8255@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8256DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8257created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8258
c0065db7 8259@example
dc8465bf
NC
8260LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8261
8262EXPORTS
8263_foo = foo
c0065db7 8264@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8265
8266The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8267@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8268@end table
dc8465bf 8269
0a5d968e 8270Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8271unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8272If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8273@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8274that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8275@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8276renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8277to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8278the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8279In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8280which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8281
8282@cindex weak externals
8283@item weak externals
8284The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8285weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8286defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8287are three variants of weak externals:
8288@itemize
8289@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8290called lazy externals.
8291@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8292This form is not presently implemented.
8293@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8294implemented.
8295@end itemize
8296As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8297are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8298uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8299
8300@cindex aligned common symbols
8301@item aligned common symbols
8302As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8303desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8304the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8305carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8306by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8307tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8308but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8309warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8310
2ca22b03
NC
8311@end table
8312
8313@ifclear GENERIC
8314@lowersections
8315@end ifclear
8316@end ifset
8317
e0001a05
NC
8318@ifset XTENSA
8319@ifclear GENERIC
8320@raisesections
8321@end ifclear
8322
8323@node Xtensa
8324@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8325
8326@cindex Xtensa processors
8327The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8328@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8329specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8330keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8331example, with the command:
8332
8333@smallexample
8334SECTIONS
8335@{
8336 .text : @{
8337 *(.literal .text)
8338 @}
8339@}
8340@end smallexample
8341
8342@noindent
8343@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8344and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8345literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8346interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8347group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8348files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8349and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8350
43cd72b9 8351@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8352@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8353Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8354provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8355is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8356literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8357will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8358location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8359the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8360unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8361@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8362range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8363
8364For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8365to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8366instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8367instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8368instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8369@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8370hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8371By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8372switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8373density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8374instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8375performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8376linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8377a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8378
8379The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8380control the linker:
8381
8382@cindex Xtensa options
8383@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8384@item --size-opt
8385When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8386more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8387no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8388alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8389preserve the correctness of the code.
8390@end table
e0001a05
NC
8391
8392@ifclear GENERIC
8393@lowersections
8394@end ifclear
8395@end ifset
8396
252b5132
RH
8397@ifclear SingleFormat
8398@node BFD
8399@chapter BFD
8400
8401@cindex back end
8402@cindex object file management
8403@cindex object formats available
8404@kindex objdump -i
8405The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8406These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8407object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8408format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8409it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8410associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8411object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8412(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8413list all the formats available for your configuration.
8414
8415@cindex BFD requirements
8416@cindex requirements for BFD
8417As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8418several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8419BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8420formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8421been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8422BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8423may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8424
8425One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8426mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8427useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8428conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8429
8430@menu
8431* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8432@end menu
8433
8434@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8435@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8436@cindex opening object files
8437@include bfdsumm.texi
8438@end ifclear
8439
8440@node Reporting Bugs
8441@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8442@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8443@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8444
ff5dcc92 8445Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8446
8447Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8448it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8449to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8450work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8451@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8452
8453In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8454information that enables us to fix the bug.
8455
8456@menu
8457* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8458* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8459@end menu
8460
8461@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8462@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8463@cindex bug criteria
8464
8465If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8466
8467@itemize @bullet
8468@cindex fatal signal
8469@cindex linker crash
8470@cindex crash of linker
8471@item
8472If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8473@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8474
8475@cindex error on valid input
8476@item
ff5dcc92 8477If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8478
8479@cindex invalid input
8480@item
ff5dcc92 8481If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8482may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8483object files are correct.
8484
8485@item
8486If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8487improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8488@end itemize
8489
8490@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8491@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8492@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8493@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8494
8495A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8496products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8497recommend you contact that organization first.
8498
8499You can find contact information for many support companies and
8500individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8501distribution.
8502
ad22bfe8 8503@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8504Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8505@value{BUGURL}.
8506@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8507
8508The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8509@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8510fact or leave it out, state it!
8511
8512Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8513problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8514assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8515matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8516the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8517location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8518were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8519into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8520specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8521and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8522
8523Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8524the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8525on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8526
8527Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8528bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8529respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8530You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8531
8532To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8533
8534@itemize @bullet
8535@item
ff5dcc92 8536The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8537the @samp{--version} argument.
8538
8539Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8540the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8541
8542@item
ff5dcc92 8543Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8544patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8545
8546@item
8547The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8548version number.
8549
8550@item
ff5dcc92 8551What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8552``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8553
8554@item
8555The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8556observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8557list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8558sufficient.
8559
8560If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8561and then we might not encounter the bug.
8562
8563@item
8564A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8565bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8566provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8567bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8568state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8569requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8570we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8571attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8572
8573If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8574@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8575object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8576@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8577how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8578
8579@item
8580A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8581incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8582
ff5dcc92 8583Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8584will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8585not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8586a chance to make a mistake.
8587
8588Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8589say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8590copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8591C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8592and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8593fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8594you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8595any conclusion from our observations.
8596
8597@item
ff5dcc92 8598If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8599diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8600@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8601If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8602context, not by line number.
8603
8604The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8605sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8606@end itemize
8607
8608Here are some things that are not necessary:
8609
8610@itemize @bullet
8611@item
8612A description of the envelope of the bug.
8613
8614Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8615which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8616changes will not affect it.
8617
8618This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8619will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8620with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8621We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8622
8623Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8624of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8625output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8626less time, and so on.
8627
8628However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8629report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8630
8631@item
8632A patch for the bug.
8633
8634A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8635the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8636a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8637to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8638
ff5dcc92 8639Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8640construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8641through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8642able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8643fixed.
8644
8645And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8646patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8647help us to understand.
8648
8649@item
8650A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8651
8652Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8653things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8654@end itemize
8655
8656@node MRI
8657@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8658@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8659To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8660linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8661alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8662described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8663simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8664@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8665linker commands; these commands are described here.
8666
8667In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8668file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8669features to make use of them.
8670
8671You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8672@samp{-c} command-line option.
8673
8674Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8675command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8676blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8677MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8678issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8679
8680Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8681
8682You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8683lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8684The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8685
8686@table @code
8687@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8688@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8689@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8690Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8691the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8692@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8693your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8694script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8695commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8696input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8697@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8698
8699@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8700@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8701Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8702in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8703
8704@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8705
8706@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8707@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8708Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8709@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8710
8711@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8712@item BASE @var{expression}
8713Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8714absolute addresses) in the output file.
8715
8716@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8717@item CHIP @var{expression}
8718@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8719This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8720
8721@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8722@item END
8723This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8724
8725@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8726@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8727Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8728language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8729
8730@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8731@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8732Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8733@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8734
8735The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8736same line, with no change in its effect.
8737
8738@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8739@item LOAD @var{filename}
8740@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8741Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8742same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8743command line.
8744
8745@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8746@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8747@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8748MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8749option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8750
8751@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8752@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8753@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8754Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8755order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8756script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8757sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8758file, in the order specified.
8759
8760@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8761@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8762@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8763@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8764Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8765@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8766
8767@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8768@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8769@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8770@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8771You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8772specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8773If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8774@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8775@end table
8776
793c5807
NC
8777@node GNU Free Documentation License
8778@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8779@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8780
370b66a1
CD
8781@node LD Index
8782@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8783
8784@printindex cp
8785
8786@tex
7ca01ed9 8787% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8788% meantime:
8789\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8790\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8791\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8792\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8793\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8794\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8795\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8796\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8797\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8798% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8799@end tex
8800
252b5132 8801@bye